DVW-A500/1 DVW-A500P/1 DVW-500/1 DVW-500P/1 BKDW-515

DVW-A500/1 DVW-A500P/1 DVW-500/1 DVW-500P/1 BKDW-515
DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER
DVW-A500/1
DVW-A500P/1
DVW-500/1
DVW-500P/1
CONTROL PANEL
BKDW-515
ANALOG COMPOSITE DECODER BOARD
BKDW-505/506
AUDIO PROGRAM PLAY BOARD
BKDW-507
PARALLEL (50P) INTERFACE KIT
BKDW-509
CONTROL PANEL
BKDW-514
OPERATION MANUAL [ English ]
1st Edition (Revised 3)
Serial No. 50001 and Higher (DVW-A500/1)
Serial No. 50001 and Higher (DVW-A500P/1)
Serial No. 50001 and Higher (DVW-500/1)
Serial No. 50001 and Higher (DVW-500P/1)
Serial No. 10001 and Higher (BKDW-515)
For the customers in the United Kingdom
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not
expose the unit to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the
cobinet. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
WARNING
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Green-and-yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured green-and-yellow must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by
the letter E or by the safety earth symbol Y or coloured
green or green-and-yellow.
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured
red.
For the customers in U.S.A.
This symbol is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk
of electric shock to persons.
This symbol is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
For the customers in Europe (For BKDW-515)
This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC
Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the
European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the
following European standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the following
Electromagnetic Environment:
E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his or her own expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority
to operate this equipment.
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual
must be used with this equipment in order to comply with
the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part
15 of FCC Rules.
WARNING: Using this unit at a voltage other than 120 V
may require the use of a different line cord or attachment
plug, or both. To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock,
refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
Table of Contents
1-1 Features ........................................................................................... 1-1
1-1-1 Features of the DVW-A500/1, A500P/1, 500/1 and 500P/1.. 1-1
1-1-2 Features of the BKDW-515 ................................................... 1-3
1-2 Optional Accessories ...................................................................... 1-5
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions
of Parts and Controls
2-1 Control Panel .................................................................................. 2-1
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel............................................................... 2-2
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel (Menu Operations Section).................. 2-5
2-1-3 Lower Control Panel (Editing Operations Section) ............... 2-7
2-1-4 Lower Control Panel (Tape Transport Section) ..................... 2-9
2-1-5 Lower Control Panel (Search Operations Section) .............. 2-11
2-2 System Set-Up Panel .................................................................... 2-13
2-3 Connector Panel ........................................................................... 2-14
Chapter 3
Setting Up the VTR
3-1 Connecting External Equipment .................................................. 3-1
3-1-1 Making Digital Connections .................................................. 3-1
3-1-2 Making Analog Connections ................................................. 3-2
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System .............. 3-3
3-2-1 External Sync Signal for the Internal Reference Video Signal
Generator ................................................................................ 3-3
3-2-2 Reference Signal for the Servo System.................................. 3-4
3-2-3 Reference Signals Connections .............................................. 3-5
3-3 Handling Cassettes ......................................................................... 3-7
3-3-1 Recommended Cassettes ........................................................ 3-7
3-3-2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes ............................................ 3-7
3-3-3 Preventing Accidental Erasure ............................................... 3-8
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings ........................................ 4-1
4-1-1 Menu Configuration ............................................................... 4-1
4-1-2 Changing Menu Settings ........................................................ 4-2
4-1-3 Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus ................................... 4-3
4-1-4 VTR Memory Bank Function ................................................ 4-4
4-1-5 IC Memory Card Function ..................................................... 4-6
4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data ..................................................... 4-11
4-1-7 Details on VTR Memory Bank and IC Memory Card
Functions .............................................................................. 4-12
4-1-8 IC Memory Card Data Compatibility Among
the DVW-A500/1 and DVW-500/1 Series VTRs ................ 4-12
4-2 HOME Menu ................................................................................ 4-13
4-2-1 Setting the Preread Function (PRE READ) ......................... 4-14
4-2-2 Simultaneous Playback During Recording (CONFI)........... 4-14
4-2-3 Selecting the Edit Mode and Edit Channel
(ASSEMBLE to INS CUE).................................................. 4-14
4-2-4 Setting Record Inhibit Mode (REC INH) ............................ 4-15
4-2-5 Selecting the Monitor Mode (PB/EE) .................................. 4-15
4-2-6 Outputting Still-Pictures (FREEZE) .................................... 4-15
4-2-7 Selecting the Capstan Servo Lock Mode (CAP LOCK) ...... 4-16
(Continued)
Table of Contents
1
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Overview
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
2
Table of Contents
4-2-8 Setting the Preroll Time (P-ROLL TIME) ........................... 4-16
4-2-9 Selecting DMC Playback (DMC) ........................................ 4-17
4-2-10 Selecting Program Playback (P.PLAY) .............................. 4-17
4-2-11 Recalling Edit Points (LAST EDIT)................................... 4-17
TC Menu ....................................................................................... 4-18
4-3-1 Setting the Time Data (TIMER SEL/RESET/SET/HOLD) 4-19
4-3-2 Setting the Time Code Reader (TC SEL) ............................ 4-21
4-3-3 Setting the Time Code Generator
(TCG SOURCE/MODE) ..................................................... 4-21
4-3-4 Selecting the Time Code Running Mode (RUN MODE) .... 4-22
4-3-5 Selecting the Drop Frame Mode (DF/NDF) (DVW-A500/1 and
500/1 only) ........................................................................... 4-22
4-3-6 Recording VITC (VITC) ...................................................... 4-23
4-3-7 Selecting CTL Display Mode (TAPE TIMER) ................... 4-23
4-3-8 ID Preset (ID PRESET) ....................................................... 4-23
4-3-9 Superimposition of Character Information
(CHARA SUPER/H-POS/V-POS) ...................................... 4-23
4-3-10 Setting the VITC Insertion Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2) ..... 4-26
CUE Menu .................................................................................... 4-27
4-4-1 Selecting a Multi-Cue Mode ................................................ 4-28
4-4-2 Registering Cue Points ......................................................... 4-28
4-4-3 Erasing Cue Point Data ........................................................ 4-30
4-4-4 Prerolling to a Cue Point ...................................................... 4-31
4-4-5 Changing a Cue Point Into an Edit Point ............................. 4-32
4-4-6 Backspace Editing ................................................................ 4-32
PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)....................................................... 4-33
4-5-1 Selecting the Input Video Signal
(VIDEO IN) ......................................................................... 4-34
4-5-2 Selecting the Reference Signal
(OUT REF) .......................................................................... 4-34
4-5-3 Switching the Control of the Digital Video Processor
(PROC CONTRL)................................................................ 4-34
4-5-4 Adjusting the Output Video Signal
(VIDEO GAIN to SYSTEM SC) ......................................... 4-34
PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)....................................................... 4-36
4-6-1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal
(A-IN ALL to A-IN CH4) .................................................... 4-37
4-6-2 Setting the Dolby NR System
(DOLBY NR) (DVW-A500/1 Series Only) ........................ 4-37
4-6-3 Setting Emphasis (EMPHASIS) .......................................... 4-37
4-6-4 Selecting the Monitor Output Signal
(MON-L SEL/MON-R SEL) ............................................... 4-37
SET UP Menu ............................................................................... 4-38
4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu .............................................................. 4-40
4-7-2 PANEL SETUP Menu ......................................................... 4-42
5-1 Preparing for Recording ................................................................ 5-1
5-1-1 Setting Switches and Menus .................................................. 5-1
5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals ......................................................... 5-2
5-1-3 Adjusting the Audio Recording Level ................................... 5-3
5-1-4 Monitoring Simultaneous Playback of Video and Audio Signals
Being Recorded .................................................................... 5-4
5-1-5 Recording Analog Audio ....................................................... 5-4
5-2 Recording ........................................................................................ 5-5
5-3 Preparing for Playback .................................................................. 5-6
5-3-1 Setting Switches and Menus .................................................. 5-6
5-3-2 Adjusting the Audio Playback Level ..................................... 5-6
5-4 Playback .......................................................................................... 5-7
5-4-1 Normal-Speed Playback ......................................................... 5-7
5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback in Jog/Shuttle/Variable Modes...... 5-8
5-4-3 Capstan Override Playback .................................................. 5-10
5-4-4 DMC Playback ..................................................................... 5-10
5-4-5 Program Playback ................................................................ 5-13
Chapter 6
Editing
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing ................................................................ 6-1
6-1-1 Overview of Automatic Editing ............................................. 6-1
6-1-2 Setting Switches and Menus .................................................. 6-2
6-1-3 Selecting the Edit Mode ......................................................... 6-3
6-1-4 Setting Edit Points .................................................................. 6-3
6-1-5 Confirming Edit Points .......................................................... 6-7
6-1-6 Cuing Up and Prerolling ........................................................ 6-7
6-1-7 Previewing ............................................................................. 6-8
6-1-8 Modifying Edit Points ............................................................ 6-9
6-1-9 Performing Automatic Editing ............................................. 6-11
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing ...................................................... 6-14
6-2-1 Performing DMC Editing..................................................... 6-14
6-2-2 Performing Quick Editing.................................................... 6-16
6-2-3 Performing Consecutive Editing.......................................... 6-17
6-2-4 Performing Preread Editing ................................................. 6-18
6-3 Manual Editing ............................................................................. 6-19
Chapter 7
Maintenance
7-1 Head Cleaning ................................................................................ 7-1
7-2 Moisture Condensation .................................................................. 7-2
Table of Contents
3
Table of Contents
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Appendix
Specifications ......................................................................................... A-1
Glossary ................................................................................................. A-5
Menu List .............................................................................................. A-7
Items Related to the Hours Meter (Hs) ........................................... A-7
Items Related to VTR Operations (000s) ........................................ A-8
Items Related to Operation Panels (100s) ..................................... A-10
Items Related to Remote Interface (200s) ..................................... A-14
Items Related to Editing (300s) ..................................................... A-15
Items Related to Prerolling (400s)................................................. A-19
Items Related to Recording Protection (500s) .............................. A-20
Items Related to the Time Code Generator (600s) ........................ A-21
Items Related to the Video Control (700s) .................................... A-24
Items Related to the Audio Control (800s) ................................... A-31
Items Related to Digital Process (900s) ........................................ A-34
Items Set by Switches on Models DVW-A500, A500P, 500,
and 500P (Ks)...................................................................... A-37
Index ........................................................................................................ I-1
Function Button List (Factory Settings) ................................. Last page
4
Table of Contents
1-1 Features
The DVW-A500/1, A500P/1, 500/1, and 500P/1
Digital Videocassette Recorders adopt the Digital
Betacam format, and are differentiated as follows:
• The DVW-A500/1 and DVW-A500P/1 are capable of
playing back analog Betacam and Betacam SP format
cassette tapes.
• The DVW-500/1 and DVW-500P/1 are not
compatible with either the analog Betacam or
Betacam SP formats.
The DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 can be used in the NTSC
color system while the DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1 can
be used in the PAL color system, though they both
adopt a component format.
Digital Betacam Format
The DVW-A500/1 series and DVW-500/1 series adopt
the newly developed Digital Betacam format as an
extension of the Betacam/Betacam SP format. The
Digital Betacam format makes the most of the
available recording area to achieve high-quality digital
recording, while maintaining analog Betacam tape
playback compatibility. The following have been
developed for this purpose:
• Coefficient recording system
• Powerful error correction system
• High-quality precision heads and drum with DT®
(Dynamic Tracking) heads
• New auto tracking system
Together, these allow 120 minutes or more of
recording time on half-inch Digital Betacam (L-size)
cassettes the same size as those for conventional
Betacam and Betacam SP.
Overview of digial signal processing
Digital video signal processing is based on the 4:2:2
component digital D-1 format and CCIR 601 standard
quantization. In addition, the data rate is compressed
with the coefficient recording system. Digital audio
signals are processed in full bits conforming to the
AES/EBU format.
analog component signals and composite signals (with
the BKDW-505/506) are digitized into CCIR 601
standard parallel data.
Audio data from the AES/EBU digital interface or A/D
converted data from analog input can be selected for
recording.
Bit rate reduction encoder
Video data are suppressed to about half by a newly
developed coefficient recording system, whose key
processes include field shuffling, blocking, DCT
(Discrete Cosine Transform), quantizing, and variable
length coding.
ECC encoder
The outer ECC (Error Correction Code) is added to the
compressed video and audio data, followed by the
inner ECC, ID data, and sync data. The ReedSolomon code is employed in this error correction
system.
Channel coding
Video and audio data with the ECC added are recorded
in the form of serial data. The Digital Betacam format
adopts a scrambled NRZI channel coding system that
is superior in off-track and noise characteristics.
Playback signal processing
The playback digital data are equalized by auto EQ
circuits and error-corrected by powerful inner and
outer ECC, which can correct most data disturbed by
noise and dropouts in the reproduced signal. Data that
cannot be corrected further are compensated by error
concealment circuits.
Output interface
Component video data are converted into serial data
and multiplexed with audio data, then output in the
serial digital interface format.
For analog output, component video data are D/A
converted into an analog component signal, while they
are encoded into composite digital, then D/A
converted into analog composite signal.
For audio outputs, the AES/EBU digital interface and
D/A converted analog audio are available.
Input interface
The component serial digital interface, conforming to
SMPTE 259M/EBU T.3267/CCIR 656-III standards,
handles component video signals and 4-channel digital
audio signals with a single BNC coaxial cable. Both
Chapter 1 Overview
1-1
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1
Overview
1-1-1 Features of the DVW-A500/1,
A500P/1, 500/1 and 500P/1
1-1 Features
Advanced Recording and Playback
Functions
Chapter 1 Overview
High-quality digital recording
The DVW-A500/1 series and DVW-500/1 series adopt
component digital video and a four-channel, 20-bit
digital audio recording system using an AES/EBU
format with a wide dynamic range. A digital signal
processing system that includes an advanced error
correction and concealment system that are unique to
digital Betacam provides superb video and audio
quality, while the adjusting and setting of a built-in
digital video processor ensures the output of precise
and stable video signals.
Playback compatibility with analog Betacam
and Betacam SP (DVW-A500/1 series only)
The DVW-A500/1 series provide playback capability
with tapes recorded on the Betacam SP VTRs, so that
Betacam users can upgrade to a digital environment
while enjoying continued access to the enormous
analog Betacam archives.
Noiseless playback with DT heads
Using the playback DT heads, you can perform
noiseless playback at 54 speeds ranging from –1 to +3
times normal speed, including still-picture playback.
Noiseless playback is also supported in the case of
both digital and analog Betacam playback.
Video and audio confidence heads
Video and audio confidence heads enable you to play
back video and audio signals on channels 1 to 4 while
recording, to check the quality of the recording.
Internal time code generator and reader
The internal time code generator allows you to record
LTC/VITC time codes and user bits together with
video and audio signals. Time codes and user bits are
read by the internal time code reader during playback.
Computer servo system
Computer-controlled servo motors provide direct drive
for the drum, capstan, and two reels, enabling quick
and accurate tape access.
Capstan override function
You can adjust the playback speed by ±15% to ensure
synchronization between, for example, two VTRs
playing back the same program.
1-2
Chapter 1
Overview
Independent level controls
The recording and playback levels of each of the four
audio channels can be set indepenently during
monitoring of audio level meters.
Features for Ease of Operation
Compact, lightweight, low power consumption
The VTR is small and light enough to be used in
outside broadcast vans or in EFP (Electronic Field
Production) assignments.
Remote control operation
The VTR has a serial RS-422A 9-pin connector to
allow control of the VTR by an external control unit
through RS-422A communications.
The VTR also comes with 9-pin REMOTE1-IN(9P)
and OUT(9P) connectors to support bridge connection
of multiple DVW-A500/1 or DVW-500/1 series units
or other VTRs equipped with 9-pin remote connectors
for simultaneous operations.
Furthermore, by using the optional BKDW-509
Parallel (50-pin) Interface Kit, you can control the
VTR from an external control unit with a parallel
interface.
Digital hours meter
Three different hour displays and one cycle count
display are supported, showing total elapsed time since
the VTR was turned on, total drum revolution time,
total tape running time and total number of threadings
and unthreadings.
Self-diagnosis
When enabled through the maintenance menu, any
malfunction causes the VTR to perform self-diagnosis,
after which it displays the relevant error code in the
display.
Easy-to-maintain plug-in boards
The VTR uses plug-in circuit boards to simplify
servicing and inspection.
Mountable in standard 19-inch rack
The unit can be mounted in an EIA-standard 19-inch
rack.
For rack mounting, refer to the Installation Manual.
1-1-2 Features of the BKDW-515
Menu-driven operations for a variety of
purposes
Six types of menus appear on the BKDW-515’s 90 ×
72 mm (35/8 inches × 27/8 inches) display, and are set
using the 10 /function buttons to the left and at the
bottom of the display.
HOME menu
Use this menu to make the basic settings for recording,
playback, and editing operations, and to select
channels to be edited during insert editing.
TC menu
Use this menu to make time code settings.
CUE menu
Use this menu to set up to 100 cue points. In page
mode, 10 cue points per page can be set on a total of
10 pages.
PF1/PF2 (Personal Function) menus
Use these menus to register up to 40 of the most
frequently used items from the other menus (up to ten
items each can be registered to PF1, ALT+PF1, PF2
and ALT+PF2). You can display the registerable items
by pressing the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button in the
SET UP menu.
SET UP menu
• Use the VTR BANK menu to memorize menu
settings of up to 8 pages.
• Use the MEMORY CARD menu to store current
settings of the VTR and up to 8 pages of the contents
of the VTR memory bank to an IC memory card.
• Use the scrollable PF1&2 ASSIGN menu to display
the items that can be registered in the PF1/PF2
menus, and to select and register the most frequently
used menu items.
• Use the scrollable VTR SETUP menu to display the
items necessary for making initial settings, and to
directly change settings without registering them to
the function buttons for each menu.
MAINTENANCE menu
Use this menu to access the maintenance functions in
conjunction with a video monitor.
For details, refer to the Installation and Maintenance
Manual.
A full complement of storage/recall
functions
These functions allow you to store and recall menu
settings in either the VTR’s internal memory banks or
IC memory cards by title.
VTR memory banks
These memory banks allow you to store up to eight
pages of VTR settings in addition to the current VTR
settings. Factory settings are also stored here, allowing
the VTR to be reset to these values at any time.
IC memory cards
Each IC memory card can hold the current VTR
settings as well as up to eight pages of settings. A
single IC memory card thus allows you to store and
recall the entire contents of the VTR memory banks.
Title function
This function allows you to add titles when storing data
to the VTR memory bank or IC memory card, thus
facilitating data retrieval and management.
A full range of editing functions
You can connect two DVW-A500/1 or DVW-500/1
series units to enable automatic or manual editing in
either assemble or insert mode. The VTR also features
a full range of editing functions, including preview,
review, preroll, and the setting or changing of edit
points.
Quick access to edit points
The following methods are provided for the setting of
edit points:
• Multi-cuing for up to 100 edit points
• Search dial with shuttle and jog functions
• Direct input through numeric buttons
Chapter 1 Overview
1-3
Chapter 1 Overview
The BKDW-515 Control Panel provides six menu
screens corresponding to the six operation modes to
allow fast and easy adjustment of necessary settings, as
well as the ability to store menu settings to a memory
card for later recall.
• Use the PANEL SETUP menu to set control panel
operations, such as the keyboard sound output.
1-1 Features
Chapter 1 Overview
DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) editing
Using the DT® (Dynamic Tracking ) heads, you can
play back a section of an edit at speeds between –1 and
+3 times normal speed, and store the speed variation in
memory for later use in automatic editing.
Split editing
In insert mode, you can set audio and video edit points
separately.
Preread editing
You can perform preread editing using video or digital
audio signals recorded on the tape as the edit source
for insert editing.
A variety of audio editing modes
You can select cut-in editing, cross-fade editing, and
fade in/out editing for the audio signals.
Display of duration between edit points
After edit point data have been set, you can display the
duration between any two IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or
AUDIO OUT points by simultaneously pressing two
buttons corresponding to those edit points.
Digital time counter
The time counter display shows CTL and time codes
(LTC/VITC1)), or user bits data to enable the precise
setting of edit points.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) LTC (Longitudinal Time Code)
Time code recorded on a longitudinal track
VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code)
Time code recorded on a video track during
the vertical blanking interval
1-4
Chapter 1
Overview
1-2 Optional Accessories
The following accessories can be used with the DVWA500/1 series and DVW-500/1 series:
BKDW-507 Audio Program Play Board
Enables the output of audio signals that retain their
original pitch during program playback. Also
stabilizes pictures during program playback.
BKDW-509 Parallel (50-pin) Interface Kit
Allows you to remotely control the DVW-A500/1
series or DVW-500/1 series from an external control
unit with a parallel interface.
BKDW-514 Control Panel
When attached in place of the BKDW-515, this
control panel makes the VTR equivalent to the DVWA500 series or DVW-500 series in function and
capability.
Note
In addition to this Operation Manual, the following
manuals are available:
• Installation and Maintenance Manual (supplied with
the DVW-A500/1 series, DVW-500/1 series or the
BKDW-515)
Provides information necessary for users to maintain
the control panel.
• Installation Manual (supplied with the DVW-A500/1
series or DVW-500/1 series)
Provides information necessary to install the VTR
and its peripherals.
• Manitenance Manual Part 1 (supplied with the DVWA500/1 series or DVW-500/1 series)
Provides information necessary for users to maintain
the VTR.
• Maintenance Manual Part 2 (available on request)
Provides additional information to fully maintain the
DVW-A500/1 series, DVW-500/1 series and the
BKDW-515. Contains details on electrical
adjustments, circuit diagrams, and other items.
The BKDW-515 and the control panel of the DVWA500/1 or DVW-500/1 series cannot be installed in
the BKDW-511 Control Panel Case.
Chapter 1 Overview
1-5
Chapter 1 Overview
BKDW-505 (for NTSC video format)/BKDW506 (for PAL video format) Analog Composite
Decoder Board
Converts in-coming analog composite video signals to
digital signals. Allows bridge connection with other
components.
References
1-1 Features
Chapter 1 Overview
1-6
Chapter 1
Overview
2-1 Control Panel
memory card insertion slot, editing operations
section, tape transport section and search operations
section
Upper control panel
Lower control panel
Menu operations section
IC memory card
insertion slot
Editing operations section
Search operations section
Tape transport section
Control panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-1
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Chapter 2 Locations
and Functions of Parts and Controls
The control panel consists of the following sections:
• Upper control panel
• Lower control panel: menu operations section, IC
2-1 Control Panel
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
1DISPLAY FULL/FINE button
2PHONES jack
3POWER switch
4PHONES level control
5 PB level
6REC level controls
controls
7Audio level meters
8Indicator window
9MONITOR SELECT button
!ºINPUT SELECT button
!¡AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons
!™VIDEO INPUT SELECT buttons
!£REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator
Upper control panel
1 DISPLAY FULL/FINE button
Changes the display range of the audio level meters.
FULL: Display range is –60 to 0 dB (peak level = 0
dB) or –40 to +20 dB (peak level = +20 dB).
Use 806. LEVEL METER SCALE in the VTR
SETUP menu to select the range.
FINE: Displays the audio level in 0.25 dB
increments. The center LED lights up in each
meter as a signal level reference. When the level
exceeds the maximum display value, the top LED
lights up. When the level falls below the
minimum display value, the bottom LED lights
up.
2-2
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2 PHONES jack
Connects stereo headphones with 8 Ω impedance for
audio monitoring during recording, playback, and
editing. Adjust the headphone output level with the
PHONES level control.
3 POWER switch
Turns on the power. When the power is turned on, the
audio level meters and menu display in the lower
control panel light up.
4 PHONES level control
Adjusts the output level to the PHONES jack.
You can enable this control to simultaneously adjust
the output level to the MONITOR OUTPUT
connectors on the connector panel.
5 PB (playback) level controls
Adjust the level of the audio output for channels 1 to 4
and the cue channel.
Pull out the controls during playback to adjust the
audio output for each channel. Push in again for
factory-set levels (+4 dB output for a signal recorded
at a reference level of 0 dB). When pushed in, the
controls cannot adjust the audio output level.
6 REC (recording) level controls
Adjust the recording level for channels 1 to 4 and the
cue channel.
Pull out the controls to adjust the recording level for
each channel in E-E mode1). Push in again for the
factory-set recording level (0 dB reference level for an
input of +4 dB). When pushed in, the controls cannot
adjust the recording level.
7 Audio level meters
Indicate the recording level in recording or E-E mode
or the playback level in playback or CONFI mode.
The display range can be changed by pressing the
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button. The reference level is
factory set at –20 dB, and the peak level at 0 dB.
Indicators and corresponding VTR status
Indicator
Status
DOLBY NR
(DVW-A500/1
series only)
Lights up when the Dolby NR circuit is
activated.
KEY INHIBIT
Lights up when the [F1] (KEYINH) button
in the PANEL SETUP menu is set to on.
CHANNEL
CONDITION
Indicates the playback signal condition.
Green: Playback signal is good.
Yellow: Playback signal is less than
good, but still reproducible.
Red: Playback signal is poor. Head
cleaning or internal inspection is
necessary if the indicator lights up
continuously.
DIGITAL
Lights up when a Digital Betacam
cassette is inserted, and turns off when
an analog Betacam cassette is inserted.
LTC
Lights up when the VTR is recording LTC
signals or reading LTC signals during
playback. Also lights up in E-E mode if
you press the REC button while the [F6]
(TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu
set to ext, allowing you to verify that the
VTR is locked to an external time code.
VITC
Lights up when the VTR is reading VITC
signals during playback, or when the VTR
is in recording or E-E mode and the video
input signal contains VITC signals. Also
lights up when the [F10] (VITC) button in
the TC menu is set to on and the VITC
signals contained in the video signal are
normal.
9 MONITOR SELECT button
Selects the audio signal to be output at the MONITOR
OUTPUT L/R connector(s). Press to light the button
up, then press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR
SELECT button(s) to specify which channel(s) are to
be monitored at the MONITOR OUTPUT L or R
connector. If you specify more than one channel to the
same MONITOR OUTPUT connector, a mixed audio
signal is output from that connector. This specification
can also be done as a menu operation.
For details, refer to “4-6-4 Selecting the Monitor Output
Signal (MON-L SEL/MON-R SEL)” on page 4-37.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) E-E mode
An abbreviation for Electric-to-Electric mode. In this
mode, video or audio input signals are passed and output
only through the VTR’s internal circuitry, and not
through the magnetic conversion system comprising tape
and heads.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-3
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
For details, refer to “5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals” on
page 5-2.
8 Indicator window
The following indicators light up to indicate the VTR’s
status.
2-1 Control Panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
!º INPUT SELECT button
Selects the audio input signal. Press to light the button
up, then press one of the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR
SELECT buttons to select the type and the channel of
the audio signal.
SIF (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects signal input to the
SERIAL V/A INPUT connector.
AES/EBU (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects signal input to
the AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors.
ANALOG (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects signal input to
the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connectors.
If you select the SERIAL V/A INPUT or AUDIO
INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors when there is no
incoming signal, the INPUT SELECT button flashes.
This specification can also be done as a menu
operation.
For details, refer to “4-6-1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal
(A-IN ALL to A-IN CH4)” on page 4-37.
!¡ AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons
Select the audio input signal when the INPUT
SELECT button lights up, or the audio signal to be
monitored when the MONITOR SELECT button lights
up.
!™ VIDEO INPUT SELECT buttons
Press one of the following buttons to select the video
input signal.
If you select a connector which has no incoming
signal, the button flashes.
SIF: Selects the serial digital video signal input to
the SERIAL V/A INPUT connector.
COMPONENT (Y-R, B): Selects the analog
component video signal input to the
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT connectors.
COMPOSITE: Selects the analog composite video
signal input to the COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT
connector.
Note
To input analog composite video signal, you must
install the optional BKDW-505 (for NTSC video
format)/BKDW-506 (for PAL video format) Analog
Composite Decoder Board.
2-4
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
!£ REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator
Press these buttons to select external equipment to be
used to remotely control the VTR.
1(9P): Press to select the unit connected to the
REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors. The
button lights up.
2(50P): Press to select the unit connected to the
REMOTE PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector (with
optional BKDW-509). The button lights up.
RS-232C indicator: Lights up when the VTR is
communicating with the external equipment
connected to the RS-232C connector.
Note
When the VTR is being controlled by external
equipment connected to the REMOTE1-IN(9P) or
REMOTE PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector, all tape
transport buttons and edit operation buttons are
disabled, except the STOP and EJECT buttons. You
may also specify the disabling or enabling of all
buttons by setting 006. LOCAL FUNCTION
ENABLE in the VTR SETUP menu.
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel (Menu Operations Section)
1Menu display
3MEMORY CARD indicator
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2Menu buttons
4ACCESS button
5IC memory card insertion slot
6Function buttons
7ALT button
8MAINTENANCE switch
9ALARM indicator
Lower control panel (menu operations section)
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-5
2-1 Control Panel
1 Menu display
Menus selected by pressing the menu buttons appear
here.
Each menu shows the functions assigned to each
function button ([F1] to [F10]) and information
necessary for making settings, such as time codes.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2 Menu buttons
Press to activate the respective menu.
HOME button: Activates the HOME menu.
Settings for basic or editing operations are made
in the HOME menu.
TC button: Activates the TC (time code) menu. In
the TC menu, you can switch between LTC and
VITC and between DF and NDF (DVW-A500/1
and DVW-500/1 only), and make settings for time
code displays on an external monitor.
CUE button: Activates the CUE menu. In the CUE
menu, you can register 10 cue points per page for
a total of 100 cue points.
PF1 button: Activates the PF (Personal Function) 1
menu. In the PF1 menu, you can register
frequently used settings in other menus. Settings
for video input/output signals are factory set.
PF2 button: Activates the PF (Personal Function) 2
menu. In the PF2 menu, you can register
frequently used settings in other menus. Settings
for audio input/output signals are factory set.
SET UP button: Activates the SET UP menu. Use
the SET UP menu to restore settings to the VTR
memory banks or IC memory card, register
functions to the PF1/2 menus, and set items in the
VTR SETUP menu.
For details, refer to “Chapter 4 Menu Settings” on page 41.
3 MEMORY CARD indicator
Lights up when the IC memory card is inserted.
4 ACCESS button
Press this button to directly activate the MEMORY
CARD menu. Flashes when the control panel is
accessing the IC memory card.
Note
Do not eject the IC memory card while the ACCESS
button lights up as this may damage the contents of the
memory card.
2-6
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
5 IC memory card insertion slot
Insert IC memory cards here. VTR settings can be
stored on cards and used to configure the VTR and
control panel at a later date, thus reducing the time
required for set up.
Press the button beside the insertion slot to eject the IC
memory card.
6 Function buttons
Activate the functions for the respective function
buttons in each menu.
7 ALT (alternative) button
Press to change the functions of the current menu.
Press again to return to the original functions.
8 MAINTENANCE switch
Activates the MAINTENANCE menu.
To operate this switch, push it in using the tip of a pen
or some other pointed object while holding down the
SFT button.
9 ALARM indicator
Lights up when the communication between the VTR
and the control panel is abnormal.
2-1-3 Lower Control Panel (Editing Operations Section)
!ºNumeric buttons and +/– buttons
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
!¡SFT button
!™RCL button
!£CLR button
!¢SET button
@£PREREAD indicator
!∞AUDIO IN/OUT buttons
!§IN/OUT buttons
!¶ENTRY button
!•Cursor control buttons
@™PLAYER/RECORDER buttons
@¡REVIEW button
@ºAUTO EDIT button
!ªPREVIEW button
Lower control panel (editing operations section)
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-7
2-1 Control Panel
!º Numeric buttons and +/– buttons
Press to input time data or edit points data at the cursor
position in menu display. Press buttons 0 to 5 while
holding down the SFT button to input A to F
(hexadecimal figures) for user bits. Use the +/–
buttons to increase or decrease settings.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
!¡ SFT (shift) button
Press buttons 0 to 5 while holding down this button to
input A to F (hexadecimal figures) for user bits.
Use also in combination with other buttons to perform
other operations.
!™ RCL (recall) button
Press to call up a previously entered value.
!£ CLR (clear) button
Press to clear a value.
!¢ SET button
Press to enter a value.
!∞ AUDIO IN/OUT buttons
Press to set AUDIO IN and OUT points during insert
mode. Press either AUDIO IN or OUT button while
holding down the ENTRY button to set an audio edit
point.
!§ IN/OUT buttons
Press to set an IN or OUT point during editing. Press
either button while holding down the ENTRY button
to set an edit point.
!¶ ENTRY button
Press to enter an edit or cue point.
While holding down this button, press either the
AUDIO IN or OUT button, or the IN or OUT button.
!• Cursor control buttons
Press to move the cursor in the menu display. Move
the cursor as required to enter a value using the
numeric buttons, or to change a menu setting.
2-8
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
!ª PREVIEW button
Press to view the results of an edit on a monitor
connected to the recorder VTR without actually
recording the edit. During previewing, the tape moves,
but actual editing is not carried out. If no IN point has
been set when you press this button, the current tape
position is set as the IN point at the start of the
preview.
@º AUTO EDIT (automatic editing) button
Press to do automatic editing after you have set the
edit points. If no IN point has been set when you press
this button, the current tape position is set as the IN
point at the start of automatic editing.
@¡ REVIEW button
Press to review results of an edit (a section between
one IN point and one OUT point) on a monitor
connected to the recorder.
@™ PLAYER/RECORDER buttons
Select which VTR is to be controlled by this VTR’s
control panel during editing when this VTR is used as
a recorder and an external VTR connected to the
REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors as a player.
PLAYER: The tape transport buttons and editing
operation buttons on the control panel control the
external player VTR.
RECORDER: The tape transport buttons and
editing operation buttons on the control panel
control the recorder VTR (this VTR).
The PLAYER/RECORDER buttons have no effect
when using this VTR alone.
@£ PREREAD indicator
Lights up during preread mode.
For details on prereading, refer to “6-2-4 Performing
Preread Editing” on page 6-18.
2-1-4 Lower Control Panel (Tape Transport Section)
@¢PREROLL button
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
@∞EJECT button
@§STANDBY button
@¶EDIT button
@•SERVO indicator
@ªSTOP button
#ºPLAY button
#¡REC button
#™REC INHIBIT indicator
Lower control panel (tape transport section)
@¢ PREROLL button
Press to position the tape to the preroll point (a
position factory set to five seconds before the IN
point).
Press this button while holding down the IN, OUT,
AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button to cue up the tape
at the edit point of the respective button.
@∞ EJECT button
Press to eject the cassette. When the button is pressed,
the tape is automatically unthreaded and the cassette is
ejected in a few seconds. Resets the display when
CTL codes appear in the menu display in the lower
control panel.
For details on changing the preroll time, refer to “4-2-8
Setting the Preroll Time (P-ROLL TIME)” on page 4-16.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-9
2-1 Control Panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
@§ STANDBY button
Press this button in other than standby mode to make it
light up and place the VTR in standby mode. The
head drum rotates in standby mode, thereby shortening
the time required for the tape to start.
Press this button while in standby mode to turn the
button off and cancel standby mode. The head drum
stops rotating and the tape tension is released. If the
VTR remains in standby mode for more than eight
minutes (factory setting), standby mode is
automatically canceled in order to safeguard the tape.
@¶ EDIT button
Press this button while holding down the PLAY button
to start manual editing.
Press this button while the VTR is in stop mode to
monitor the signal selected in the HOME menu in E-E
mode. To cancel E-E mode and stop the tape, press
the STOP button.
Hold down this button while the VTR is playing back,
searching for an edit point, fast-forwarding or
rewinding to monitor the video signal in E-E mode.
@• SERVO indicator
Lights up when the drum servo and capstan servo are
locked.
@ª STOP button
Stops the tape (stop mode).
When PB is selected with the ALT button and [F2]
(PB/EE) button in the HOME menu, a still picture is
output when you press this button. In stop mode, the
head drum continues rotating and the tape is wound
around the head drum.
When you insert the cassette, the VTR automatically
enters stop mode.
The STOP button flashes when the [F2] (OUT REF)
button in the PF1 menu is set to input but there is no
video input signal, when the [F2] (OUT REF) button in
the PF1 menu is set to ref but there is no external
reference video signal, or when the input signal is out
of phase with the external reference video signal. If
you want, you can set 105. REFERENCE SYSTEM
ALARM in the VTR SETUP menu so that the STOP
button will not flash under the above conditions.
2-10
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
#º PLAY button
Starts playback.
Press this button while holding down the REC button
to start recording, or while holding down the EDIT
button to start manual editing.
Pressing this button during recording or manual editing
changes the VTR to playback mode.
#¡ REC button
Press this button while holding down the PLAY button
to start recording.
Hold down this button while the VTR is playing back,
searching for an edit point, fast-forwarding or
rewinding to monitor the video and audio signals in EE mode.
Press the STOP button during monitoring to return to
the video and audio monitored before you pressed the
REC button.
#™ REC INHIBIT indicator
Lights up or goes off, depending on the setting of the
ALT button and [F1] (REC INH) button in the HOME
menu and the state of the record-protect plug on the
cassette.
Status of the REC INHIBIT indicator
Setting of the ALT State of the record- REC INHIBIT
and [F1] (REC INH) protect plug on the indicator
buttons in the
cassette
HOME menu
all, crash, video,
audio
Disabled/enabled
Lit
off
Disabled
Lita)
Enabled
Unlit
a) By setting 107. REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING in the
VTR SETUP menu, you can change the setting so that the
indicator flashes here.
Recording, editing, and selection of assemble and
insert modes are possible only when the indicator is
unlit.
2-1-5 Lower Control Panel (Search Operations Section)
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
#£ VAR button
#¢ JOG button
#∞ SHUTTLE button
#§ Search dial
Lower control panel (search operations section)
#£ VAR button
Press to select variable speed playback mode for
noiseless playback in a maximum range of –1 to +3
times normal playback speed, in 54 steps. The
playback exceeding this speed range is not possible. In
this mode, the VAR button lights up, and the search
dial clicks at the positions for still-picture and normal
playback speed.
#¢ JOG button
Press to select jog mode. In this mode, the button
lights up and playback at –1 to +1 or –3 to +3 times
normal playback speed is possible (selectable in the
VTR SETUP menu). The playback speed corresponds
to the rotational speed of the dial. In this mode, the
search dial does not click.
#∞ SHUTTLE button
Press to enter shuttle mode. In this mode, the button
lights and playback at –50 to +50 times normal
playback speed is possible when using Digital
Betacam tape, or at –35 to +35 (DVW-A500/1 only) or
–42 to +42 (DVW-A500P/1 only) times normal
playback speed when using analog Betacam tape. The
playback speed corresponds to the angle of rotation of
the dial. In this mode, the search dial clicks at the
positions for 0 (still-picture), –10 and +10 times
normal playback speed.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-11
2-1 Control Panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
#§ Search dial
Rotate to search for edit points. Rotate the dial
clockwise for forward playback (the z indicator lights
up) or counterclockwise for reverse playback (the Z
indicator lights up). The p indicator lights up while
the VTR is in stop mode.
Press the dial to toggle the VTR between shuttle and
jog modes.
Shuttle mode: The playback speed corresponds to
the angle of rotation of the dial (–50 to +50 times
normal speed when playing back a Digital
Betacam tape, and –35 to +35 (DVW-A500/1
only) or –42 to +42 (DVW-A500P/1 only) times
normal speed when playing back an analog
Betacam tape). The dial clicks at the positions
corresponding to 0 (still-picture), –10 and +10
times normal playback speed.
Jog mode: The playback speed, which corresponds
to the rotational speed of the dial, ranges from –1
to +1 or –3 to +3 times normal playback speed
(selectable in VTR SETUP menu). The dial does
not click.
Variable speed playback mode: Noiseless playback
at –1 times normal speed when the dial is rotated
fully counterclockwise, and +3 times normal
speed when rotated clockwise. The dial clicks at
the positions of still-picture and normal playback
speed.
Capstan override mode: Rotating the dial while
holding down the PLAY button changes the
playback speed by up to ±15%.
After turning the power on, always set the search dial
at the center position (where the p indicator lights up).
2-12
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-2 System Set-Up Panel
Lift the lower control panel up to its horizontal
position to access the system set-up panel.
Chapter 2
Accessing the system set-up panel
CONTROL PANEL switch
System set-up panel
CONTROL PANEL switch
Selects which control panel controls this VTR.
INT: Control is by the control panel attached to this
VTR.
EXT: Control is by the optional BKDW-514
connected to the CONTROL PANEL connector.
The switch is factory-set to INT.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-13
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Lower control panel
2-3
Connector
Panel
2-3
Connector
Panel
1 COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT
connectors
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
connectors
7 COMPONENT VIDEO
OUTPUT connectors
3 COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors
and 75Ω termination switch
8 SERIAL V/A OUTPUT connectors
4 REF.VIDEO INPUT connectors and
75Ω termination switch
9 SERIAL V/A INPUT connectors
5BREAKER button
0 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors
6AC IN connector
!¡ AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600Ω
termination switches
!¶ VIDEO CONTROL
connector
!™ ANALOG AUDIO INPUT
connectors
!• RS-232C connector
!£ ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT
connectors
!ª PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector
!¢ CONTROL PANEL connector
@º AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors
!∞ REMOTE1-IN/OUT(9P) connectors
@¡ TIME CODE OUT connector
!§ MONITOR OUTPUT connectors
@™ TIME CODE IN connector
Connector panel
2-14
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
1 COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT connectors
(BNC)
Output analog composite video signals. The signal
output to connector 3(SUPER) contains superimposed
characters for time data or menu settings when on is
selected with the ALT button and [F6] (CHARA
SUPER) button in the TC menu.
4 REF.VIDEO INPUT connectors (BNC) and 75Ω
termination switch
One of these connectors accepts a reference video
signal. Use a video signal with chroma burst (BVS) or
a black and white video signal (VS) as a reference
video signal.
When making a bridge connection with a loop-through
output, set the 75Ω termination switch to OFF.
Otherwise, set it to ON.
5 BREAKER button
Disconnects the primary circuit of the AC power
transformer should an excessive current be detected.
6 AC IN connector
Connects to an AC outlet using the power cord
supplied with the VTR.
7 COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT connectors
(BNC)
Output analog component video signals (Y/R-Y/B-Y).
8 SERIAL V/A (video/audio) OUTPUT connectors
(BNC)
Output up to four (1 to 4) serial digital video/audio
signal lines. The signal output to connector 4(SUPER)
contains superimposed characters for time data or
menu settings when on is selected with the ALT button
and [F6] (CHARA SUPER) button in the TC menu.
!¡ AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600Ω termination
switches
Set according to the audio input level of each channel
input to the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connectors and
the audio input impedance.
LOW with OFF:
Audio input level: –60 dBu (microphone input)
Audio input impedance: High (about 20 kΩ)
HIGH with OFF:
Audio input level: +4 dBu (line input)
Audio input impedance: High (about 20 kΩ)
HIGH with ON:
Audio input level: +4 dBm (line input)
Audio impedance: 600 Ω
!™ ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connectors
(XLR-3-32)
Accept up to five analog audio signal lines (channels 1
to 4 and cue).
!£ ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT connectors
(XLR-3-31)
Output up to five analog audio signal lines (channels 1
to 4 and cue).
!¢ CONTROL PANEL connector (15-pin)
Connects the control panel through the 15-pin cable
supplied with the optional BKDW-510 Control Panel
Extension Kit when using the control panel as a remote
controller.
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
2-15
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
3 COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors
(BNC) and 75Ω termination switch (with
optional BKDW-505 for DVW-A500/1 and 500/
1, or BKDW-506 for DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1)
Accepts analog composite video signal.
Set the 75Ω termination switch to OFF when this VTR
is bridge-connected. Otherwise, set it to ON.
0 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors
(XLR-3-31)
Accept up to two lines (four channels: channels 1/2
and channels 3/4) of AES/EBU format digital audio
signals.
Chapter 2
2 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT connectors
(BNC)
Accept analog component video signals (Y/R-Y/B-Y).
9 SERIAL V/A (video/audio) INPUT connectors
(BNC)
The left connector accepts serial digital video/audio
signals. When the VTR is powered on, the right
connector serves as an active loop-through output to
allow a bridge connection.
2-3 Connector Panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
!∞ REMOTE1-IN/OUT (9P) connectors
(D-sub 9-pin)
Connect to another DVW-500/1 or 500P/1 VTR or D1, D-2, or Betacam VTR through a 9-pin remote
control cable. Used when you edit using two VTRs
and the BVE-900/910/2000/9000/9100 Editing Control
Unit. The REMOTE1-IN and OUT connectors can be
used to make a bridge connection.
!§ MONITOR OUTPUT connectors (XLR-3-31)
Output signals for audio monitoring. These connectors
output two signal lines: L and R. Select the signals to
be output with the MONITOR SELECT buttons and
the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons on
the upper control panel. Through an initial setting, you
can enable the adjustment of the volume level with the
PHONES level control.
For details, refer to “5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals”on page
5-2.
!¶ VIDEO CONTROL connector (D-sub 15-pin)
Connects to the optional BVR-50/50P TBC Remote
Controller to enable remote control of the internal
digital video processor. Before connecting the remote
controller, turn off the power to the VTR.
!• RS-232C connector (D-sub 25-pin)
Receives or transmits RS-232C remote control signals
and/or VTR status data from/to external equipment.
When this connector is being used for communication,
the RS-232C indicator on the upper control panel
lights up.
!ª PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector (D-sub 50-pin,
with optional BKDW-509)
Inputs an external remote control signal.
For details, refer to the Installation Manual.
@º AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU) connectors
(XLR-3-32)
Output a maximum of two lines (four channels:
channels 1/2 and 3/4) of AES/EBU format digital
audio signals.
2-16
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
@¡ TIME CODE OUT connector (XLR-3-31)
Outputs one of the following time codes according to
the VTR operation mode.
In playback mode: Playback time code
In recording mode: Time code generated by the
internal time code generator, or time code input to
the TIME CODE IN connector.
@™ TIME CODE IN connector (XLR-3-32)
Accepts an external time code for recording to tape.
Connect to the time code output connector of the
external equipment.
3-1 Connecting External Equipment
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Chapter 3 Setting Up the
VTR
3-1-1 Making Digital Connections
The diagram below shows how to connect this VTR to
another DVW-A500/1 series or 500/1 series VTR used
as a player and to a DVR-2100/2100P D-1 Component
Digital VTR used as a recorder.
DVW-A500/1 or DVW-500/1 series, or BVW-D75 series (player)
BNC cable
SERIAL V/A OUTPUT
Input
REMOTE1-IN
COMPONENT or DVW-A500/1 or DVW-500/1
COMPOSITE
series VTR
VIDEO OUTPUT
SERIAL V/A INPUT
BNC cable
BNC cable
BNC cable
BNC cable
9-pin remote cable
SERIAL V/A OUTPUT
REMOTE1-OUT
REMOTE1-IN
9-pin remote cable
SERIAL V/A
INPUT
REMOTE1
Output
Video monitor
DVR-2100/2100P (recorder)
Making digital connections
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-1
3-1 Connecting External Equipment
3-1-2 Making Analog Connections
The diagram below shows how to make connections
for analog video and audio signals from a Betacam/
Betacam SP VTR, 1-inch VTR, or D-2 VTR.
DVR-28/20 D-2 VTR or
BVH-3000 1-inch VTR etc.
(player)
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CH-1 to 4
Setting Up the VTR
BNC cable
COMPONENT or
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT
Making analog connections
Chapter 3
AUDIO
OUTPUT CH-1
to 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
Set the analog audio input level and impedance
using the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600Ω termination
switches as follows:
For line input with a 600Ω termination: HIGH with
ON
For high-impedance line input: HIGH with OFF
For high-impedance microphone input: LOW with
OFF
3-2
BVW-75/70/65/60 series
Betacam SP VTR (player)
BNC cable
Set the 75Ω
termination
switch to OFF
when making a
bridge
connection for
an analog
composite video
signal.
Otherwise, set it
to ON.
ANALOG VIDEO
OUTPUT
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT
(with BKDW-505/506)
9-pin remote cable
ANALOG AUDIO
OUTPUT CH-1 to 4
REMOTE (9P)
BNC cable
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
REMOTE (9P)
Video monitor
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo
System
This section describes how reference signals for the
video output and servo system are selected.
The output from the internal reference video signal
generator is supplied as a reference signal for the video
output signals and servo circuits.
3-2-1 External Sync Signal for the Internal Reference Video Signal Generator
The internal reference video signal generator
synchronizes with either the input reference video
signal or a video input signal. Which of the two
signals is used for synchronization depends on the
signal input conditions and the setting of the [F2]
(OUT REF) button in the PF1 menu, as shown in the
following flow chart.
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Start
Setting of the
[F6] (TCG SOURCE)
button in the TC
menu?
ext
int
input
Setting of the
[F2] (OUT REF)
button in the
PF1 menu?
ref
Is a signal being
input to the connector
selected by either the
VIDEO INPUT SELECT button or
the [F1] (VIDEO IN) button
in the PF1 menu?
Yes
The video signal input through the
connector, and selected by either the
VIDEO INPUT SELECT button or the
[F1] (VIDEO IN) button in the PF1
menu, is used for synchronization.
No
Is a signal
being input to one of the
REF.VIDEO INPUT
connectors?
No
Yes
The reference video signal input
through one of the REF.VIDEO
INPUT connectors is used for
synchronization.
The internal reference video
signal generator is not
synchronized with any signal
(internal free-run).
Automatic selection of external sync signal for the internal reference video signal generator
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-3
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System
3-2-2 Reference Signal for the Servo System
The VTR automatically selects either the video input
signal or the output from the internal reference video
signal generator as the reference signal for the servo
system. Which of the two signals is selected depends
on the operational status of the VTR, as shown in the
following flow chart.
Start
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Setting of the [F6]
(TCG SOURCE) button
in the TC menu?
ext
int
Setting of the [F2]
(OUT REF) button in
the PF1 menu?
input
ref
Is the VTR
in edit mode?
Yes
No
No
Is the VTR in
recording mode?
Yes
Is a signal being
input to the video input
connector selected?
No
Is a signal being input
to the connector selected by
either the VIDEO INPUT
SELECT button or the [F1]
(VIDEO IN) button in
the PF1 menu?
Yes
No
Yes
The servo locks with the
reference video signal being
input to either of the
REF.VIDEO INPUT connectors.
The servo locks with the internal
reference video signal
generator.
The servo locks with the video
input signal selected by either
the VIDEO INPUT SELECT
button or the [F1] (VIDEO IN)
button in the PF1 menu.
Automatic selection of reference signal for the servo system
3-4
Chapter 3
Setting Up the VTR
3-2-3 Reference Signals Connections
Make the reference signal connections as follows,
according to your recording or playback requirements.
Reference signal connections
For recording signals from a switcher or
signal generator
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Reference signal
Switcher or signal generator
SERIAL V/A INPUT
REF.VIDEO INPUT
75Ω termination switch: ON
For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator
For recording signals from a VTR
Reference signal
REF.VIDEO INPUT
SERIAL V/A
OUTPUT
SERIAL V/A INPUT
DVW-A500/1 series or DVW-500/1 series
(recorder)
75Ω termination switch: OFF
DVW-A510/510 series
(player)
75Ω termination switch: ON
For recording signals from a VTR
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-5
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System
For playback
Reference signal
REF.VIDEO INPUT
SERIAL V/A
OUTPUT 1/2/3/
4(SUPER)
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
75Ω termination switch: ON
For playback
3-6
Chapter 3
Setting Up the VTR
Serial monitor
3-3 Handling Cassettes
3-3-1 Recommended Cassettes
For the DVW-A500/1 series
You can use 1/2-inch Digital Betacam video cassettes
for both recording and playback, and 1/2-inch
Betacam/Betacam SP video cassettes for playback
only.
3-3-2 Inserting and Ejecting
Cassettes
Always turn on the VTR before attempting to insert or
eject cassettes.
Inserting a cassette
For the DVW-500/1 series
You can use 1/2-inch Digital Betacam video cassettes
only.
S-size cassettes
BCT-D6/D12/D22/D32/D40
L-size cassettes
BCT-D34L/D64L/D94L/D124L
2 S-size cassette
Betacam/Betacam SP cassettes
Metal tape
Oxide tape
S-size
cassettes
BCT-5MA/10MA/
20MA/30MA
BCT-5G/10G/20G/30G
L-size
cassettes
BCT-5MLA/
10MLA/20MLA/
30MLA/60MLA/
90MLA
BCT-5GL/10GL/20GL/
30GL/60GL/90GL
Storage of cassettes
Store your cassettes at room temperature and normal
humidity.
L-size cassette
Inserting a cassette
1
2
Set the POWER switch to ON.
Before inserting a cassette, check the following
points:
• There is no slack in the tape.
• An error message does not appear in the menu
display.
• The window of the cassette is facing up.
If there is any slack in the tape, refer to “Removing
slack in the tape” on next page.
When inserting an S-size cassette, make sure it is
aligned with the marks on the cassette insertion
slot.
The cassette is loaded automatically, and the tape is
wound around the drum. The head-drum starts to
rotate, the tape stops, and the STANDBY and
STOP buttons light up.
When a Betacam/Betacam SP video cassette is
loaded into a DVW-A500/1 series VTR, the
DIGITAL indicator goes off.
When a Betacam/Betacam SP video cassette is
loaded into a DVW-500/1 series VTR, the cassette
is automatically ejected.
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-7
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
1
Digital Betacam cassettes
3-3 Handling Cassettes
Removing slack in the tape
Press one of the reels in slightly, then carefully rotate it
in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
3-3-3 Preventing Accidental
Erasure
To prevent accidental erasure of material recorded on a
tape, push in the record-protect plug.
L-size cassette
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
S-size cassette
Removing slack in the tape
Preventing double cassette inserting
When a cassette is loaded, an orange lock-out bar
appears in the cassette insertion slot to prevent users
from attempting to load another cassette.
Push in the record-protect plug. To restore the tape for
recording, return the plug to its original position.
Preventing accidental erasure
Ejecting the cassette
Press the EJECT button.
The tape is unthreaded and the cassette is
automatically ejected. This operation takes a few
seconds.
3-8
Chapter 3
Setting Up the VTR
When a cassette with this plug pushed in is inserted
into the VTR, the REC INHIBIT indicator on the
lower control panel lights up and recording will not
start, even if you press the REC button.
To restore the tape for recording, return the plug to its
original position.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
4-1-1 Menu Configuration
In addition to the six main menus, the VTR has two
supplementary menus containing items not contained
in the main menus.
PF1&2 ASSIGN menu
This menu contains items that can be registered to the
PF1/2 menus.
Press the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button in the SET UP
menu to display this menu.
For details on registering items in the PF1&2 ASSIGN
menu to the PF1/2 menus, refer to “4-1-3 Registering Items
to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3.
For details on setting operating conditions of the VTR, refer
to “4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu” on page 4-40.
The menu configuration of the VTR is shown in the
figure below,
HOME menu
PF1&2
ASSIGN menu
TC menu
PF1 menu
PF2 menu
Registration
CUE menu
VTR SETUP
menu
SET UP menu
[F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button
¿
[F6] (VTR SETUP) button
Menu configuration
• All items in the HOME, TC, and CUE menus can be
duplicated and registered to the PF1/2 menus.
• Most items in the VTR SETUP menu can be
registered to the PF1/2 menus.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-1
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
VTR SETUP menu
This menu contains items that specify the initial
operating conditions of the VTR. You can change
these settings directly without registering the items to
the PF1/2 menus.
Press the [F6] (VTR SETUP) button in the SET UP
menu to display this menu.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
The operating conditions of the VTR are set by the
menu operation section on the lower control panel.
Menu items are divided among six different menus
(HOME, TC, CUE, PF1, PF2, SET UP).
Of these menus, the PF1/PF2 (Personal Function)
menus can be used to register frequently used menu
items from the other menus, allowing faster setting of
VTR operating conditions. Eight VTR memory banks
are provided for storing up to eight sets of menu
settings. The contents of the eight VTR memory
banks can, in turn, be stored on an IC memory card for
later recall.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
4-1-2 Changing Menu Settings
2
To activate the HOME, TC, CUE, PF1, PF2, or SET
UP menu, press the respective menu button.
Menu items are assigned to function buttons ([F1] to
[F10]) in each menu. When two items are registered to
the same function button, you can display the second
item by pressing the ALT button.
The example below describes the procedure for
changing the setting of capstan servo lock mode
specified by the ALT button and [F5] (CAP LOCK)
button in the HOME menu.
RECINH
TCR
PB/EE
PB/EE
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Press the HOME button.
The first page of the HOME menu appears in the
display.
D O L B Y N R CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME
GREEN BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
off
off
ÅSSEMBLE
LOCK
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
off
INS
TC
off
4-2
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
Chapter 4
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
CÅP
LOCK
P-ROLL
TIME
2FD
5S
DMC
P-PLÅY
LÅST
EDIT
Menu Settings
Press the [F5] (CAP LOCK) button to change the
capstan servo lock mode setting.
Each press of the button changes the setting.
Changing menu settings using the cursor
control buttons
Changing menu settings
TCR
LOCK
NDF 4FD F1
To return to the first page
Press the ALT button again.
23
CONFI
PLÅY
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
FREEZE
3
PRE
REÅD
D O L B Y N R CH.COND DIGITÅL ÅLT+HOME
GREEN BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
off
1
1
Press the ALT button.
The second page of the HOME menu appears in
the display.
You may also use the cursor control buttons to select
menu items and change menu settings by moving the
on-screen cursor.
For settings which cannot be made by the function
buttons alone, the following icons appear in the
bottom-right of the menu to indicate the use of the
cursor control buttons:
: All cursor control buttons
: Cursor control buttons for horizontal
direction
: Cursor control buttons for vertical direction
In addition to operations using the cursor control
buttons, some menus allow you to change a value by
using the +/– buttons.
4-1-3 Registering Items to the
PF1/2 Menus
You can register up to 40 items to the PF (Personal
Function) 1/2 menus, including items that are
displayed when the ALT button is pressed. The
registration of items from different menus to the PF1/2
menus eliminates the need for changing menus in
order to change a given VTR operating condition.
PF1
ÅLT+
PF1
Selected function
button
Item currently
registered to the
button
For details on the factory-set PF1/2 menus, refer to “4-5
PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)” on page 4-33 and “4-6 PF2
Menu (Factory Settings)”on page 4-36.
3
2
ÅLT+
PF2
SETUP MENU
SETUP ITEM-610
605:TCG REGEN
606:TC OUT SIG.
607:BINÅRY GP
608:PHÅSE CORR.
609:TCG CF FLÅG
610:REGEN MODE
611:TC RGN SRC
701:EE DELÅY
703:BLÅNK LINE
704:DEC MODE
SÅVE/
CANCEL EXIT
To cancel a currently registered item
Press the [F6] (SET BLANK) button.
5
4,5
Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to the
PF1&2 ASSIGN menu, then press the G or g
button to move the cursor to the menu item to be
registered to the function button.
To scroll the menu faster
Press the G or g button while holding down the
SFT button.
PF1
ÅLT+
PF1
6 81
PF2
Registering items to the PF1/2 menus
1
2
3
4
ÅLT+
PF2
Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
Press the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button.
The PF1&2 ASSIGN menu appears in the display.
Press the [F1] (PF1), [F2] (ALT+PF1), [F3] (PF2)
or [F4] (ALT+PF2) button to select the PF menu
where you wish to register an item.
The selected PF menu appears and the items
currently registered to the menu appear at the left
of the display.
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the function button where the item is to be
registered.
The selected function button is highlighted and the
currently registered item appears.
6
7
ÅLT+PF1
F6KEY
1:710
REGEN
2:110
MODE
3:201
as&in
4:203
5:
6:610
7:
8:703
9:704
10:
SET
BLÅNK PÅSTE
SETUP MENU
SETUP ITEM-610
605:TCG REGEN
606:TC OUT SIG.
607:BINÅRY GP
608:PHÅSE CORR.
609:TCG CF FLÅG
610:REGEN MODE
611:TC RGN SRC
701:EE DELÅY
703:BLÅNK LINE
704:DEC MODE
SÅVE/
CANCEL EXIT
Item to be
registered to the
function button
Press the [F7] (PASTE) button to register the item.
The new item is registered to the function button.
Repeat Steps 3 to 6 to register more items.
To cancel the registration of all new items
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button.
8
Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button to save the
newly registered items.
The registration is completed and the SET UP
menu appears in the display again.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-3
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Registering items to the PF1/2 menus
PF2
ÅLT+PF1
F6KEY
1:710
REGEN
2:110
MODE
3:201
as&in
4:203
5:
6:610
7:
8:703
9:704
10:
SET
BLÅNK PÅSTE
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
4-1-4 VTR Memory Bank
Function
Storing the current VTR menu settings to
a VTR memory bank
Eight VTR memory banks are provided for storing up
to eight sets of menu settings including items
registered to the PF1/2 menus with titles.
The contents of all eight VTR memory banks can be
stored on an IC memory card.
Current menu settings in the
VTR (CURRENT SETUP).
These settings are stored in
addition to the VTR memory
banks when the power is
turned off.
2
6,7
43 1
Storing/recalling
CLR button
5
Storing the current VTR menu settings to a VTR memory bank
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Storing/recalling
IC memory card (SETUP
BANK 0 to 8). The card
stores setting data in same
way as the VTR memory
banks. These contents can
be later called up in the
VTR.
VTR memory banks (SETUP
BANK1 to 8 and [F]). SETUP
BANK[F] contains the factoryset menu settings. By calling
up SETUP BANK [F], you can
restore all menu items to their
factory settings.
1
2
Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
Press the [F1] (VTR BANK) button.
The VTR BANK menu appears in the display.
VTR BÅNK
Storing/recalling
TCR 00:00:00:00
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
1
2
3
4 FOOTBÅLL12
5 (PRESET)
6
7 (PRESET)
8
ƒ (PRESET)
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT SETUP
ç
VTR memory bank function
For details on IC memory card use, refer to “4-1-5 IC
Memory Card Function” on page 4-6.
For details on adding titles to the contents of the VTR
memory bank, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data” on
page 4-11.
Note
EDIT
TITLE
DIRECTION
COPY
EXIT
<<
3
4
The contents of SETUP BANK[F] cannot be changed.
Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button to select >>.
Press the f button to move the cursor (z) to
CURRENT SETUP[C], then press the [F6] (EDIT
TITLE) button to add a title to the current menu
settings of the VTR.
For details, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data”
on page 4-11.
5
4-4
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to
SETUP BANK, then press the G or g button to
move the cursor to the number of the VTR
memory bank to be used for saving the current
menu settings.
6
Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
To cancel the storage operation
Press the CLR button.
7
1
2
EDIT
TITLE
B
8
CÅNCEL
COPY
EXIT
5
SÅVE/
EXIT
Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button and select <<.
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the VTR memory bank to be
recalled.
Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
To cancel the recalling operation
Press the CLR button.
Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu appears again.
Recalling menu settings from a VTR
memory bank
2
6
Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
The menu settings are recalled from the selected
VTR memory bank.
When the recalling process has been completed,
the title of the VTR bank appears under
CURRENT SETUP in the display.
5,6
VTR BÅNK
TCR 00:00:00:00
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
1
2
3
4 FOOTBÅLL12
5 (PRESET)
6
7 (PRESET)
8
ƒ (PRESET)
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT SETUP
FOOTBÅLL12
3 71
4
Recalling menu settings from a VTR memory bank
EDIT
TITLE
DIRECTION
COPY
EXIT
<<
(Continued)
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-5
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
EDIT TITLE
SET
LETTER
DIRECTION
<<
3
4
BÅCK
SPÅCE
TCR 00:00:00:00
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
1
2
3
4 FOOTBÅLL12
5 (PRESET)
6
7 (PRESET)
8
ƒ (PRESET)
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT SETUP
To add or change a title for VTR settings
after storing them to the VTR memory bank
Move the cursor (z) to the number of the VTR
where the settings are stored, then press the [F6]
(EDIT TITLE) button.
SPÅCE
Press the [F1] (VTR BANK) button.
The VTR BANK menu appears in the display.
VTR BÅNK
Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
The current menu settings are stored to the VTR
memory bank.
6789:;<=>?@ÅBCDEFGHIJKLM
Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
7
Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu appears again.
3,4,5
2
4-1-5 IC Memory Card Function
You can store menu settings in the VTR memory
banks and cue point data to an IC memory card for
later recalling.
The MEMORY CARD indicator lights up when you
insert an IC memory card.
You can then access the MEMORY CARD menu
directly from other menus (HOME/TC/CUE/PF1/PF2)
by pressing the ACCESS button.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
MEMORY CARD indicator
1
Formatting an IC memory card
1
2
Insert the IC memory card.
The MEMORY CARD indicator lights up.
Press the ACCESS button.
MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display.
ACCESS button
FORMÅT
CÅRD
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
IC Memory card insertion slot
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
CURRENT SETUP
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
>>
IC memory card function
To eject the IC memory card
Press the button to the right of the insertion slot.
3
Notes
• Insert the IC memory card fully until it clicks.
• The ACCESS button flashes while the VTR is
writing to or reading from an IC memory card. Do
not eject the IC memory card while the indicator is
flashing.
Formatting an IC memory card
The supplied IC memory card or other IC memory
cards must be formatted before you can use them.
4-6
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4
5
Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button while
holding down the SFT button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display again.
Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button while
holding down the SFT button.
The VTR starts formatting the card.
To cancel formatting
Press the CLR button while the confirmation
message appears in the display.
Storing the contents of the VTR memory
banks to an IC memory card
5
2 7,8
Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to the
VTR side, then press the G or g button to move
the cursor to the number of the VTR memory bank
to be stored.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
6 3 91 4,5
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK4
SETUP BANK3
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
VTR memory
bank number
<<
Storing the contents of the VTR memory banks to an IC memory card
2
Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
You can access the MEMORY CARD menu
directly by pressing the ACCESS button.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
CURRENT SETUP
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
>>
3
4
To store the current VTR menu settings
only
Move the cursor (z) to the [C] (CURRENT
SETUP) position.
Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button and select <<.
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the VTR memory bank in the IC
memory card where the data are to be stored.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
Bank number in
the IC memory card
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK4
CURRENT SETUP
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
<<
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
1
To store all VTR memory banks
Press the [F7] (SELECT ALL) button.
6
To change the title of the bank, press the [F6]
(EDIT TITLE) button.
For details, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the
Data”on page 4-11.
7
8
Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
The control panel stores the specified VTR
memory bank to the IC memory card.
After the storage is complete, the title of the VTR
memory bank appears under the MEMORY CARD
indication.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK4
SETUP BANK3
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
FOOTBÅLL12 4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
<<
(Continued)
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-7
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
9
Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
3
Press the [F4] (SHOW CUESET) button.
The display for storing cue point lists appears.
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
CUE POINT SET1
CURRENT CUESET
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
(Blank)
1
ƒ (Blank)
(Blank)
2
SHOW
(
B
l
a
n
k
)
3
SETUP
4
5
6
SHOW
7
CUESET
(Blank)
8
FORMÅT
CÅRD
Storing cue point lists to an IC memory
card
You can store up to 8 pages of cue point lists to an IC
memory card along with titles.
EDIT
TITLE
2 3 6,7
SELECT DIRECÅLL
TION
COPY
EXIT
>>
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
To return to the SET UP menu
Press the [F3] (SHOW SETUP) button.
8 4 91
5
4
5
Storing cue point lists to an IC memory card
1
2
Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly
by pressing the ACCESS button.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
CURRENT SETUP
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
>>
4-8
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button to select <<.
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the memory bank in the IC memory
card where you want to store the cue point list.
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
CUE POINT SET1
CURRENT CUESET
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
(Blank)
1
ƒ (Blank)
(Blank)
2
SHOW
(
B
l
a
n
k
)
3
SETUP
4
5
6
SHOW
7
CUESET
(Blank)
8
FORMÅT
CÅRD
Bank number in
the IC memory card
EDIT
TITLE
SELECT DIRECÅLL
TION
COPY
EXIT
>>
6
7
Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
The VTR stores the cue point list to the IC memory
card.
8
Press the [F6] (EDIT TITLE) button to add a title
to the cue point list.
4
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the memory bank in the IC memory
card whose contents are to be recalled.
For details, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the
Data”on page 4-11.
9
FORMÅT
CÅRD
Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
Bank number in
the IC memory card
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
Recalling the contents of an IC memory
card
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
CURRENT SETUP
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
>>
5
2 7,8
To change the title of the memory bank, press the
[F6] (EDIT TITLE) button.
You can also change a title after recalling its
respective contents from the memory bank.
For details, refer to“4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data”on
page 4-11.
6
5 3 91 4,6
Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to the
VTR side, then press the G or g button to move
the cursor to the VTR memory bank number where
the recalled data are to be stored.
Recalling the contents of an IC memory card
1
2
Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly
by pressing the ACCESS button.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
CURRENT SETUP
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
>>
3
FORMÅT
CÅRD
Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
SETUP BÅNK 7
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
VTR memory
bank number
To change the current VTR menu settings
Move the cursor (z) to [C] (CURRENT SETUP).
To replace all VTR memory bank contents
with IC memory card data
Press the [F7] (SELECT ALL) button.
7
Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button to select >>.
(Continued)
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-9
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
The contents stored in an IC memory card can be
recalled to the current VTR bank or VTR memory
bank.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
8
9
Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
The VTR recalls the contents of the memory card.
After the recalling process is complete, the title of
the memory bank of the memory card appears
under the VTR indication.
3
Press the [F4] (SHOW CUESET) button.
The menu for storing cue point lists appears.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
MEMORY CÅRD
SETUP BÅNK1
0
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
(PRESET) 2
(PRESET) 3
4
5
6
(PRESET) 7
8
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
EDIT
TITLE
SELECT DIRECÅLL
TION
Recalling a cue point list in an IC memory
card
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Recalling a cue point list in an IC memory card
replaces the current VTR cue point list with the
recalled data.
23 6,7
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT CUESET
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
COPY
To return to the SET UP menu
Press the [F3] (SHOW SETUP) button again.
4
5
Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button to select >>.
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the memory bank in the IC memory
card.
FORMÅT
CÅRD
4 81
5
Bank number of
the IC memory card
Recalling a cue point list in an IC memory card
1
EXIT
>>
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
MEMORY CÅRD
SETUP BÅNK1
0
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
(PRESET) 2
(PRESET) 3
4
5
6
(PRESET) 7
8
EDIT
TITLE
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT CUESET
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
SELECT DIRECÅLL
TION
COPY
EXIT
>>
2
Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly
by pressing the ACCESS button.
6
7
FORMÅT
CÅRD
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
MEMORY CÅRD
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK1
CURRENT SETUP
0
ç B Å S E B Å L L ...
B Å S E B Å L L ... 1
1
(PRESET) 2
2
(PRESET) 3
3 FOOTBÅLL12
4
4 (PRESET)
5
5
6
6 (PRESET)
(PRESET) 7
7
8
8
ƒ (PRESET)
EDIT SELECT DIRECCOPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
>>
4-10
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
The VTR recalls the cue point list in the IC
memory card.
After the recalling process is completed, the name
of the cue point list appears under the CURRENT
CUESET indication.
8
Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
3
Press the f or F button to select a letter.
EDIT TITLE
4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data
B
6789:;<=>?@ÅBCDEFGHIJKLM
When storing data to a memory bank in an IC memory
card or the VTR, you can add a title to the data to
make data management easier.
2
SPÅCE
4
BÅCK
SPÅCE
SET
LETTER
CÅNCEL
SÅVE/
EXIT
Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button .
The selected letter is entered.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
EDIT TITLE
4 5
1,3
6789:;<=>?@ÅBCDEFGHIJKLM
Adding titles to the data
1
2
Move the cursor (z) to CURRENT SETUP[C] or
the number of the memory bank in the IC memory
card.
Press the[F6](EDIT TITLE) button to display the
EDIT TITLE widnow.
SPÅCE
5
BÅCK
SPÅCE
SET
LETTER
CÅNCEL
SÅVE/
EXIT
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.
To enter a space
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.
If you enter a wrong character
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) to go back, then
reenter a character.
EDIT TITLE
B
6789:;<=>?@ÅBCDEFGHIJKLM
SPÅCE
BÅCK
SPÅCE
SET
LETTER
CÅNCEL
To cancel the procedure to start again
Press [F9] (CANCEL) button, then reenter a
character.
SÅVE/
EXIT
6
Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.
The entered title is set and the menu displayed
before you pressed the EDIT TITLE button
appears again.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-11
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
4-1-7 Details on VTR Memory
Bank and IC Memory Card
Functions
Most setting of most items can be stored to a VTR
memory bank or an IC memory card, with the
exception of the settings described below:
Data that can be stored to/recalled from a VTR
memory bank or IC memory card
• Settings of items in the VTR SETUP menu (with the
exceptions listed below)
• Contents of the PF1/2 menus
• VTR memory bank titles
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Data that cannot be stored to a VTR memory
bank or an IC memory card
Settings of the following items in the VTR SETUP
menu are not stored to memory:
• 603. ID CODE
• Items related to the hours meter (H01 to H14)
Current settings are always maintained for these items.
4-1-8 IC Memory Card Data
Compatibility Among the DVWA500/1 and DVW-500/1 Series
VTRs
IC memory card data recorded on one DVW-A500/1
series or 500/1 series VTR (VTR A) can be read into
the VTR memory banks of another DVW-A500/1
series or DVW-500/1 series VTR (VTR B) and
equipped with the BKDW-515. If both VTRs are
identical in model and optional accessories, the entire
IC memory card contents are read and applied as is. If
the VTRs differ either in model or optional
accessories, the following will occur:
• Settings for those items that are common to both
VTR A and VTR B are read (i.e, items that are
common to most VTRs and unaffected by series or
configuration differences).
• Settings that exist on VTR B but not on VTR A
remain unchanged.
For example, if VTR A is a DVW-500/1 and VTR B
is a DVW-A500/1, the analog Betacam playback
settings on VTR B are not changed by data input
from the IC memory card.
• Settings for items that exist only on VTR A are not
read.
4-12
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
• Settings for items that exist only on VTR A and have
been assigned to the PF1/2 menus are not read, and
the respective function buttons do not appear in menu
display on the BKDW-515 attached to VTR B.
4-2 HOME Menu
To activate the HOME menu
Press the HOME button.
The HOME menu sets the basic VTR operation
conditions for recording, playback, and editing.
The HOME, TC, PF1 and PF2 menus show
information that includes the VTR operation mode,
time code of the current position, and time code type,
etc.
To change the HOME menu page
Press the ALT button.
Channel condition
PRE
REÅD
Operation mode
Signal format of the playback tape
D O L B Y N R CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME
KEY-INH GREEN BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
off
TCR
CONFI
off
ÅSSEMBLE
Name of the displayed menu
LOCK
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
Title of the current VTR SETUP menu
Capstan lock mode
off
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
INS
TC
off
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
HOME menu display
For details on time codes, refer to “4-3 TC Menu” on page
4-18.
HOME menu
Button
Indication
Function
Settings
[F1]
PRE READ
Selects the PRE READ function setting.
off, [video, audio, a/v]
[F2]
CONFI
Selects the simultaneous playback setting.
on, off
[F3]
ASSEMBLE
Selects the edit mode and edit channel.
on, off
[F4]
INS TC
[F5]
INS VIDEO
[F6]
INS A-CH1
[F7]
INS A-CH2
[F8]
INS A-CH3
[F9]
INS A-CH4
[F10]
INS CUE
ALT/[F1]
REC INH
Selects the REC INH (record inhibit) mode.
off, [all, crash, video, audio]
ALT/[F2]
PB/EE
Selects the monitor mode.
PB/EE, PB
ALT/[F3]
FREEZE
Selects the still-picture function setting.
on, off
ALT/[F5]
CAP LOCK
Selects CAP LOCK (capstan servo lock) mode.
2FD, 4FD, 8FD (DVW-A500P/1 and
500P/1 only)
ALT/[F6]
P-ROLL TIME
Sets the preroll time.
0 to 30 s
ALT/[F7]
DMC
Selects DMC playback.
ALT/[F8]
P-PLAY
Selects program playback.
ALT/[F10]
LAST EDIT
Restores the last edit point set.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-13
4-2 HOME Menu
4-2-1 Setting the Preread
Function (PRE READ)
To perform prereading during insert edit mode, press
the [F1] (PRE READ) button while holding down the
SFT button.
Each press of the [F1] (PRE READ) button selects off,
video, audio or a/v. Select video, audio, a/v through
319. PREREAD SELECT in the VTR SETUP menu.
off: The preread function is disabled.
video: Video signals are preread.
audio: Audio signals are preread.
a/v: Both video and audio signals are preread.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
[F1] button
SFT button
Setting the preread function
You can use the preread function to perform prepread
editing.
For details, refer to “6-2-4 Performing Preread Editing” on
page 6-18.
4-2-3 Selecting the Edit Mode
and Edit Channel (ASSEMBLE to
INS CUE)
Selects assemble or insert edit mode.
Selecting assemble edit mode
After setting the [F4] (INS TC) to [F10] (INS CUE)
buttons to off, set the [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button to on.
Selecting the insert edit mode
Set the [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button to off and select the
required insert channel by pressing the [F4] (INS TC)
button to [F10] (INS CUE) button.
Selecting the insert channel
[F4] (INS TC) button: Time Code
[F5] (INS VIDEO) button: Video signal
[F6] (INS A-CH1) button: Digital audio signal
(channel 1)
[F7] (INS A-CH2) button: Digital audio signal
(channel 2)
[F8] (INS A-CH3) button: Digital audio signal
(channel 3)
[F9] (INS A-CH4) button: Digital audio signal
(channel 4)
[F10] (INS CUE) button: Analog cue channel
For details on editing procedures, refer to “Chapter 6
Editing” on page 6-1.
4-2-2 Simultaneous Playback
During Recording (CONFI)
To monitor the video and audio signals during
recording by simultaneous playback, set the [F2]
(CONFI) button to on.
The VTR’s confidence heads also allow you to play
back the section of a tape before and after the edit
portion during editing.
The CONFI function is set through 316.
CONFIDENCE PB MODE in the VTR SETUP menu.
4-14
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-2-4 Setting Record Inhibit
Mode (REC INH)
If you attempt to an operation that is prohibited by the
record inhibit mode, the REC INHIBIT indicator
flashes as a warning.
Either setting can be specified during analog Betacam
playback on the DVW-A500/1 series; in actual
operation, however, only PB (playback) signals are
output.
4-2-6 Outputting Still-Pictures
(FREEZE)
To output a still-picture, select on (manual still) by
pressing the ALT button, then press the [F3]
(FREEZE) button.
A still-picture shows the video data being played back
right before the pressing of the button. Make the field
or frame selection through 903. FREEZE MODE in
the VTR SETUP menu.
To maintain the still-picture
Set 904. FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in
the VTR SETUP menu to latch.
A still-picture output is maintained until you select off
by pressing the [F3] (FREEZE) button.
To temporarily output a still-picture
Set 904. FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in
the VTR SETUP menu to momentary. A still-picture
is output as long as you hold down the [F3] (FREEZE)
button.
Auto-freeze function
REC INHIBIT indicator
Setting record inhibit mode (REC INH)
4-2-5 Selecting the Monitor Mode
(PB/EE)
Press the ALT button, then the [F2] (PB/EE) button to
select the video/audio signals to be output in fastforward, rewind, stop, or standby mode.
PB/EE: Outputs input signals.
PB: Always outputs PB signals.
To automatically output a still-picture when channel
conditions have deteriorated during the playback, set
905. AUTO FREEZE CONTROL in the VTR SETUP
menu to MODE1 or MODE2.
dis: The auto-freeze function is disabled.
MODE1: The auto-freeze function is enabled, but is
automatically cancelled when channel conditions
have recovered enough for normal playback.
MODE2: The auto-freeze function is enabled, but is
automatically cancelled when you stop playback
with the STOP button, then start playback again.
Stop-freeze function
To automatically output a still-picture when the VTR
is changed to stop mode, set 906. STOP FREEZE
CONTROL in the VTR SETUP menu to enable.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-15
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Press the ALT button, then the [F1] (REC INH) button
to set the record inhibit mode of the VTR.
Each press of the [F1] (REC INH) button selects off,
all, crash, video, or audio.
Select all, crash, video, or audio through 310. REC
INHIBIT in the VTR SETUP menu.
off: Recording is enabled (the REC INHIBIT
indicator is off).
all: Recording is disabled (the REC INHIBIT
indicator lights up).
crash: Normal recording is disabled (the REC
INHIBIT indicator lights up), but recording in
assemble or insert edit mode is possible.
video Recording of video and CTL signals is
disabled.
audio: Recording of audio and CTL signals is
disabled.
Note
4-2 HOME Menu
4-2-7 Selecting the Capstan
Servo Lock Mode (CAP LOCK)
Press the ALT button, then the [F5] (CAP LOCK)
button to select the capstan servo lock mode when you
edit or play a tape with decoded component signals
(i.e., a tape with composite input data recorded on a
Digital Betacam VTR or Betacam/Betacam SP VTR).
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 only
2FD: The capstan servo is locked every 2 fields.
Since color framing is disabled, phase shifting (Hshifting) of output video signals does not occur
during playback. This is the normal setting for
editing or playback of component signals.
To enhance the frequency characteristics, Hshifting of the video output on the basis of the
decoding information on the tape may also be
performed by setting 712. VIDEO PROCESS ON
CAP LOCK 2 FIELD in the VTR SETUP menu.
4FD: The capstan servo is locked to the color frame
every 4 fields. The VTR maintains the phase of
the video output signals even after repeated
stopping and restarting of playback.
Use this setting if you require continuity in video
phase at edit points during editing or playback of
composite signals, or when you perform AB
rolling.
DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1 only
2FD: The capstan servo is locked every 2 fields.
Since color framing is disabled, phase shifting (Hshifting) of output video signals does not occur
during playback. This is the normal setting for
editing or playback of component signals.
To enhance the frequency characteristics, Hshifting of the video output on the basis of the
decoding information on the tape may also be
performed by setting 712. VIDEO PROCESS ON
CAP LOCK 2 FIELD in the VTR SETUP menu.
4FD: The capstan servo is locked every 4 fields.
This is the normal setting for editing of
component signals with quick servo lock.
To enhance the frequency characteristics, Hshifting of the video output on the basis of the
decoding information on the tape may also be
performed by setting 712. VIDEO PROCESS ON
CAP LOCK 2 FIELD in the VTR SETUP menu.
4-16
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
8FD: The capstan servo is locked to the color frame
every 8 fields. The VTR maintains the phase of
the video output signals even after repeated
stopping and restarting of playback.
Use this setting if you require continuity in video
phase at edit points during editing or playback of
composite signals, or when you perform AB
rolling.
4-2-8 Setting the Preroll Time
(P-ROLL TIME)
Set the preroll time by pressing the ALT button, then
press the [F6] (P-ROLL TIME) button.
You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1second units. During editing on this VTR, a preroll
time of 5 seconds or more is recommended.
Setting the preroll time
1,3
2
Setting the preroll time
1
2
3
Press the ALT button, then the [F6] (P-ROLL
TIME) button.
A data entry window appears.
Change the setting with the G or g button.
You may also use the + or – button.
Press the [F6] (P-ROLL TIME) button.
The data entry window disappears.
4-2-9 Selecting DMC Playback
(DMC)
In DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback mode,
the VTR plays back a tape segment at a specified
variable speed of –1 to +3 times normal playback
speed, memorizes the speed, then plays the segment
back at a later time at the memorized speed.
DMC playback is useful during on-the-spot telecasts of
sporting events for immediate playback and broadcast
of highlight scenes for which starting and ending
points have been set during recording.
4-2-11 Recalling Edit Points
(LAST EDIT)
While editing, you can recall the last edit points by
pressing the ALT button, then the [F10] (LAST EDIT)
button.
The edit points appear in the display.
PRE
REÅD
off
LOCK
TCR
CONFI
off
Edit points
For detail on the procedure for DMC playback, refer to “54-4 DMC Playback” on page 5-10.
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL H O M E
GREEN BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
ÅSSEMBLE
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
off
INS
TC
During tape editing using two DVW-A500/1 series or
500/1 series VTRs, you can use DMC playback to
control the playback speed of the player VTR for
editing at variable speeds (DMC editing).
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
off
Recalling edit points (LAST EDIT)
For details on DMC editing, refer to “6-2-1 Performing
DMC Editing” on page 6-14.
Selecting DMC playback
Set 111. PROGRAM PLAY in the VTR SETUP Menu
to disable.
The ALT/[F8] (P-PLAY) button in the display
disappears (only one of either playing modes can be
specified at any time).
4-2-10 Selecting Program
Playback (P-PLAY)
In program playback mode, you can play a tape at a
previously specified speed.
For details on program playback, refer to “5-4-5 Program
Playback” on page 5-13.
Selecting program playback
Set 111. PROGRAM PLAY in the VTR SETUP menu
to enable.
A data entry window appears, and the ALT/[F7]
(DMC) button in the display disappears (only one of
either playing modes can be specified at any time).
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-17
4-3
TCTC
Menu
4-3
Menu
To activate the TC menu
Press the TC button.
The TC menu allows you to set time code-related
items through a single menu.
The HOME, TC, PF1 and PF2 menus show
information that includes the VTR operation mode,
time code of the current position, and the time code
type, etc.
TCR: Time data type
(CTL/TCR/UBR/TCG/UBG/DUR)
INTRP (interpolation): This appears when time
code cannot be read correctly and correction
has been performed.
TIMER
SEL
D O L B Y N R CH.COND DIGITÅL TC
GREEN
TC
TIMER
RESET
VITC: Time code type (LTC/VITC)
To change the TC menu page
Press the ALT button.
TIMER
SET
TCR VITC INTRP
Data entry window
LOCK
DF 4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
F1: Field number (F1/F2)
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
DF: This appears when drop frame mode data is
being recorded or played (DVW-A500/1 and
500/1 only).
TIMER
HOLD
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
off
TC
SEL
TCG
SOURCE
TCG
MODE
RUN
MODE
DF/NDF
VITC
VITC
int
prst
rec
DF
on
AIN: Time data for an AUDIO IN point
AOUT: Time data for an AUDIO OUT point
IN: Time data for an IN point
OUT: Time data for an OUT point
Information shown in the HOME, TC, PF1 and PF2 menus
For details on operation modes, refer to “4-2 HOME
Menu” on page 4-13.
TC menu
Indication
TIMER SEL
Function
Settings
[F1]
Selects time data type.
CTL, TC, UBIT
[F2]
TIMER RESET
Resets the time counter.
[F3]
TIMER SET
Sets the time data.
[F4]
TIMER HOLD
Holds the time counter.
on, off
[F5]
TC SEL
Sets the time code reader.
VITC, AUTO, LTC
[F6]
TCG SOURCE
Selects the internal/external time code generator.
int, ext
[F7]
TCG MODE
Sets the time code generator.
regen, prst
[F8]
RUN MODE
Selects the running mode of the time code.
free, rec
[F9]
Selects drop frame mode.
DF, NDF
[F10]
DF/NDF (DVWA500/1 and 500/1
only)
VITC
Specifies recording of VITC.
on, off
ALT/[F1]
TAPE TIMER
Selects the CTL display mode.
+/–12H, 24H
ALT/[F2]
ID PRESET
Specifies ID preset.
on, off
ALT/[F6]
ALT/[F7]
CHARA SUPER
CHARA H-POS
Specifies superimposition of character information.
Changes the superimposition position (horizontal).
on, off
0 to 24 (DVW-A500/1 and 500/1)
0 to 22 (DVW-A500P/1 and
500P/1)
ALT/[F8]
CHARA V-POS
Changes the superimposition position (vertical).
0 to 6A (DVW-A500/1 and 500/1)
0 to 81 (DVW-A500P/1 and
500P/1)
ALT/[F9]
VITC POS-1
Specifies the VITC insertion line.
12 to 20 (DVW-A500/1 and 500/1)
(9 to 22 (DVW-A500P/1 and
500P/1)
ALT/[F10]
VITC POS-2
Button
4-18
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
12 to 20 (DVW-A500/1 and 500/1)
(9 to 22 (DVW-A500P/1 and
500P/1)
4-3-1 Setting the Time Data
(TIMER SEL/RESET/SET/HOLD)
The display shows the following types of time data:
Time data type
TCR LTC
The LTC1) value read by the time code
reader during playback.
TCR VITC
The VITC1) value read by the time code
reader during playback.
TCG
The value generated by the time code
generator during recording.
CTL
The number of CTL signals2) on the tape
during recording/playing.
UBR LTC
The user bits3) value read by the time
code reader (LTC) during playback.
UBR VITC
The user bits value read by the time code
reader (VITC) during playback.
UBG
The user bits value generated by the time
code generator during recording.
DUR
Appears whenever a duration between
any two edit points (IN, OUT, AUDIO IN
or AUDIO OUT points) is displayed.
Press the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button repeatedly to
select the desired time data display.
CTL: Counts the CTL signals on the playback tape
or the CTL signals being recorded on the tape, and
displays the tape running time in hours, minutes,
seconds, and frames.
TC: Displays the value read by the time code reader
or the value generated by the time code generator.
To switch between VITC and LTC, press the [F5]
(TC SEL) button.
UBIT: Displays user bits data inserted in time code
being played back, or the user bits data inserted in
time code being recorded. To switch between
VITC and LTC, press the [F5] (TC SEL) button.
Time data for IN, OUT, AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT
points are also displayed.
Indication
Time data type
IN
Time data for an IN point.
OUT
Time data for an OUT point.
AUDIO IN
Time data for an AUDIO IN point.
AUDIO OUT
Time data for an AUDIO OUT point.
TIMER
SEL
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL T C
GREEN
TC
TIMER
RESET
TIMER
SET
TCR VITC PLAY
LOCK
DF 4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
Time data for
edit points
TIMER
HOLD
off
TC
SEL
TCG
SOURCE
TCG
MODE
RUN
MODE
DF/NDF
VITC
VITC
int
prst
rec
DF
on
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) LTC and VITC
LTC cannot be read when the tape speed is very slow or
is changed suddenly. VITC, on the other hand, can be
read more accurately than LTC when the VTR is stopped
or the tape speed is very low. VITC, however, cannot be
read when the tape speed is very fast.
2) CTL signals
CTL (control) signals are pulse signals that are recorded
horizontally in each frame.
3) User bits
Comprising a part of the time code, user bits record
supplementary information and consist of an eight-digit
number or hexadecimal A to F.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-19
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Indication
Selecting the time data display
4-3 TC Menu
To cancel entered value
Press the CLR button.
Setting time code
Before starting the procedure below for setting time
data, set the [F6] (TCG SOURCE) button to int, the
[F7] (TCG MODE) button to prst, and the [F10]
(VITC) button to on. When not recording VITC, set
the [F10] (VITC) button to off.
3
Press the SET button to set the entered
value.
If you pressed the + or – button, then entered a
value, the result of calculation appears in the
display.
Note
SET is displayed.
Set the [F8] (RUN MODE) button to rec before setting
the time data for recording. When you select rec, time
data advances from a set value only during recording.
When you select free, time code advances in real time
after the initial value has been set.
TIMER
SEL
TC
TIMER
RESET
TIMER
SET
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
1 4
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL T C
GREEN SET
01 00 30 00
2
LOCK
TCR VITC PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
TIMER
HOLD
off
4
3
TC
SEL
TCG
SOURCE
TCG
MODE
RUN
MODE
DF/NDF
VITC
VITC
int
prst
rec
DF
on
Press the [F3] (TIMER SET) button.
The input value is set as the time code and appears
in the time data display section.
Setting time code
1
2
TIMER
SEL
Press the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button to select the
TC (time code) to be set.
Enter the new setting in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons.
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When
the entered value is less than eight digits, the
leading digit(s) is (are) set to 0 when you press the
SET button.)
TIMER
SEL
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL T C
GREEN
01 00 30 00
TC
LOCK
TIMER
RESET
TIMER
SET
TCR VITC PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
TIMER
HOLD
off
4-20
TC
SEL
TCG
SOURCE
TCG
MODE
RUN
MODE
DF/NDF
VITC
VITC
int
prst
rec
DF
on
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Data entry
window
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL T C
GREEN
01 00 30 00
TC
TIMER
RESET
TIMER
SET
LOCK
TCR VITC PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 00µ 30ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
TIMER
HOLD
off
TC
SEL
TCG
SOURCE
TCG
MODE
RUN
MODE
DF/NDF
VITC
VITC
int
prst
rec
DF
on
Notes
• Time code from an external time code generator
cannot be set.
• Time code cannot be set when the internal time code
generator is locked to external time codes or time
codes read by the time code reader.
Resetting time data
Press the [F2] (TIMER RESET) button.
The internal time code generator is reset according to
the setting of the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button.
Resetting CTL data
The time data display becomes 00H00M00S00F and
all edit points are erased.
Resetting TC or UBIT data
The internal time code generator is reset and the time
data display becomes 00H00M00S00F (TC) or 00 00
00 00 (UBIT). Edit points are not affected.
• Time data read by the time code reader cannot be
reset.
• Time data cannot be reset when the internal time code
generator is locked to external time codes or time
codes read by the time code reader.
When the target time arrives, press the [F3]
(TIMER SET) button.
The time code generator starts operating from the
specified time.
4-3-2 Setting the Time Code
Reader (TC SEL)
Press the [F5] (TC SEL) button to select the time code
to be read by the time code reader during playback.
VITC: Reads VITC.
AUTO: Reads VITC when the playback speed is +/
–1/2 times normal speed or less, and LTC when it
is greater than +/–1/2 times normal speed.
LTC: Reads LTC.
Depending on the time code recorded on a tape, VITC
or LTC appears on the display.
Time codes that are read by the time code reader or
played back are output from the TIME CODE OUT
connector.
Setting the user bit value
1
2
3
4
Press the ALT button, then select off by pressing
the [F2] (ID PRESET) button.
Press the ALT button again, then select UBIT by
pressing the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button.
Enter the desired user bit value in hexadecimal
notation using the numeric buttons.
(Press the 0 to 5 buttons while holding down the
SFT button to enter the letters A to F.)
Press the [F3] (TIMER SET) button.
Recording the current time
1
2
3
Select df by pressing the [F9] (DF/NDF) button
(DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 only).
Select free by pressing the [F8] (RUN MODE)
button.
Enter the target time with the numeric buttons
while verifying the data in the data entry window.
4-3-3 Setting the Time Code
Generator (TCG SOURCE/MODE)
There are two ways to record time codes on the VTR.
One way is to record the output of the VTR’s internal
time code generator. The other is to directly record
time codes that are input from an external time code
generator.
The output from the internal time code generator can
either be set to a specified initial value, or
synchronized with an external time code generator.
Selecting the time code generator
Press the [F6] (TCG SOURCE) button repeatedly to
select the time code generator.
int: Selects the time code generated by the internal
time code generator.
ext: Selects an external time code input to the TIME
CODE IN connector, or synchronizes the internal
time code generator to an external time code
generator.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-21
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Notes
4
4-3 TC Menu
Synchronizing the internal time code
generator to an external time code
Make these settings to synchronize the internal time
code generators of multiple VTRs, or to record the
playback time code signal of an external VTR without
waveform attenuation.
1
To synchronize the internal time code generator
to external LTC
Connect the TIME CODE IN connector to an
external time code generator or the time code
output connector of an external VTR.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
To synchronize the internal time code generator
to VITC of the input video signals
Select the input video signals by pressing the [F1]
(VIDEO IN) button in the PF1 menu.
2
Set the following function buttons as shown below:
[F6] (TCG SOURCE) button: To ext.
[F7] (TCG MODE) button: To regen (regenerate).
[F10] (VITC) button: To on when recording
VITC.
[F5] (TC SEL) button: To LTC when
synchronizing to LTC. Set to VITC when
synchronizing to VITC.
[F6] (TCG
[F7] (TCG
SOURCE) button MODE) button
Settings
ext
prst
Directly records an
external time code.
ext
regen
Records the time code
of the internal time
code generator in
synchronization with
an external time code.
int
prst
Records the time
codes of the internal
time code generator
from a set value.
To check the running of the internal time code
generator
Press the STOP button to stop the VTR, then press the
REC button.
4-3-4 Selecting the Time Code
Running Mode (RUN MODE)
Press the [F8] (RUN MODE) button to select the time
code running mode.
free: The time code advances when the power is on
regardless of the VTR’s operation mode.
rec: The time code advances only during recording.
When the settings have been completed, the
internal time code generator starts operating in
synchronization with the external time code
generator.
4-3-5 Selecting the Drop Frame
Mode (DF/NDF) (DVW-A500/1 and
500/1 only)
The following table shows the conditions specified by
the various settings of the [F6] (TCG SOURCE) and
[F7] (TCG MODE) buttons.
Press the [F9] (DF/NDF) button to select the running
mode for the CTL counter and the time code generator.
DF: Drop frame mode1) (DF is displayed.)
NDF: Non-drop frame mode2) (NDF is displayed.)
Note
When the [F7] (TCG MODE) button is set to regen,
the drop frame mode is inoperative since the time code
generator is synchronized to the playback time code.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) Drop frame mode
In order to compensate for differences between time
code values from the time code generator and the actual
time, the drop frame mode causes the time code
generator to omit the first two frames (frame 00 and 01)
in each minute except the tenth.
4-22
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
2) Non-drop frame mode
A mode of advancing the time code in such a way that
the difference in frame values between real time and the
time code is neglected. Using this mode produces a
difference of approximately 86 seconds per day between
real time and the time code.
4-3-6 Recording VITC (VITC)
Press the [F10] (VITC) button to specify the recording
of VITC.
on: Records VITC generated by the internal time
code generator.
off: Does not record VITC. However, records VITC
inserted in the video input signal.
For details on the VITC insertion line, refer to “4-3-10
Setting the VITC Insertion Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)” on
page 4-26.
4-3-9 Superimposition of
Character Information (CHARA
SUPER/H-POS/V-POS)
When you select on by pressing the ALT button and
then the [F6] (CHARA SUPER) button, time data and
operation mode are indicated as character data
superimposed onto the signals output from the
SERIAL V/A OUTPUT 4(SUPER) and VIDEO
OUTPUT COMPOSITE 3(SUPER) connectors.
Contents of superimposed data
1 Types of time data
Press the ALT button, then the [F1] (TAPE TIMER)
button to select a 12-hour or 24-hour clock for the
CTL display.
+/–12H: 12-hour clock
24H: 24-hour clock
Time data
2 Drop frame mark of the time
code reader (DVW-A500/1
and 500/1 only)
3 Drop frame mark of the time
code generator (DVW-A500/1
and 500/1 only)
4 Field mark of the
VITC data
4-3-8 ID Preset (ID PRESET)
T C R .
The presetting of the ID code in non-volatile memory
as user bits data allows you to recall and record it
during later recording sessions.
Press the ALT button, then the [F2] (ID PRESET)
button to select the ID code recording mode.
on: Records the preset ID code as user bits data.
off: Records the user bits set through the control
panel.
To preset ID code, reset 603. ID CODE PRESET in
the VTR SETUP menu.
R
2 3
:
5 9
S H U T T L E
5 Control VTR
indication
.
4 0
.
1 8
S T
I
L L
*
6 Operation mode
Contents of superimposed data
Note
The example above shows the factory-set contents of
data.
You can display different time data on the second line
by changing the setting of 005. DISPLAY
INFORMATION SELECT in the VTR SETUP menu.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-23
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-3-7 Selecting CTL Display
Mode (TAPE TIMER)
4-3 TC Menu
1Types of time data
Indication
Time data
CTL
CTL counter data
TCR
Time data of the LTC reader
UBR
User bits data of the LTC reader
TCR.
The time data of the VITC reader
UBR.
User bits data of the VITC reader
TCG.
Time data of the time code generator
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
UBG
User bits data of the time code generator
IN
IN point or starting point of the DMC memory
OUT
AI
OUT point or the ending point of the DMC
memory
AUDIO IN point
AO
AUDIO OUT point
DUR
Duration between two points edit (IN, OUT,
AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT) points
Note
When a time data or user bits reading error has
occurred, an asterisk (“*”) is displayed where the error
has occurred. For example, “T*R”, “U*R”, “T*R.”, or
“U*R.”.
2 Drop frame mark of the time code reader
(DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 only)
“•”: Drop frame mode (factory-setting)
“:”: Non-drop frame mode
3 Drop frame mark of the time code generator
(DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 only)
“•”: Drop frame mode (factory-setting)
“:”: Non-drop frame mode
4 Field mark of the VITC data
“ ” (blank): Fields 1 and 3 are displayed.
“*”: Fields 2 and 4 are displayed.
5 Control VTR indication
When editing using two VTRs, this indication tells you
which VTR is being controlled by the control panel.
This indication does not appear when two VTRs are
not being used.
R: The VTR control panel controls the recorder VTR
(the RECORDER button on the control panel
lights up).
P: The VTR control panel controls the player VTR
(the PLAYER button on the control panel lights
up).
4-24
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
6 Operation mode
This display is divided into three blocks (A, B, and C),
as shown in the following figure.
Block A: Operation mode
Block B: Servo lock condition or tape speed
Block C: Edit segment during automatic editing, or a
p mark indicating tape speed memorization for
recording/playback in DMC mode
A
Operation mode
B
C
Operation mode display configuration
Indication
Block A
Operation mode
Block B
TAPE UNTHREAD
No cassette is loaded.
STANDBY OFF
Standby off mode
T.RELEASE
Tension release mode
STOP
Stop mode
F.FWD
Fast-forward mode
REW
Rewind mode
PAUSE
Pause mode
PREROLL
Preroll mode
PLAY
Playback mode (servo unlock)
PLAY
LOCK
Playback mode (servo lock)
PLAY
Deviation (%) from normal
playback speed
Capstan override mode or program play mode
REC
Recording mode (servo unlock)
LOCK
EDIT
EDIT
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
REC
Recording mode (servo lock)
Edit mode (servo unlock)
LOCK
Edit mode (servo lock)
JOG
STILL
Still-picture in jog mode
JOG
FWD
Jog in normal direction (z indicator lights up.)
JOG
REV
Jog in reverse direction (Z indicator lights up.)
SHUTTLE
(speed)
Shuttle mode
VAR
(speed)
Variable mode
DMC
(speeda))
DMC playback mode
D-PREV
(speeda))
Preview mode during DMC editing
D-EDIT
(speeda))
DMC edit mode
DMC-SPD
(speed)
During initial speed setting in DMC mode
PLY-SPD
Deviation (%) from normal
playback speed
Tape speed setting for program play
PREVIEW
Preview mode
AUTO EDIT
Automatic edit mode
REVIEW
Review mode
a) Initial speed or memorized speed
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-25
4-3 TC Menu
Changing the superimposition position
DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 only
The superimposition position can be moved up to 37
increments (hexadecimal 00 to 24) in the horizontal
direction and up to 106 increments (hexadecimal 00 to
6A) in the vertical direction.
4-3-10 Setting the VITC Insertion
Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)
VITC signals can be inserted at two positions between
the 12th line and 20th line (DVW-A500/1 and 500/1)
or between the 9th line and 22nd line (DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1).
DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1 only
The superimposition position can be moved up to 35
increments (hexadecimal 00 to 22) in the horizontal
direction and up to 129 increments (hexadecimal 00 to
81) in the vertical direction.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
1,3
2
Setting the VITC insertion line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)
1
1,3
2
Changing the superimposition position
1
2
3
2
Press the ALT button, then the [F9] (VITC POS-1)
button.
A data entry window appears.
Press the G or g button to change the value.
You can also use the +or – button.
Press the ALT button and then the [F7] (CHARA
H-POS) button to move the superimposition
position in the horizontal direction, or the [F8]
(CHARA V-POS) button to move it in the vertical
direction.
A data entry window appears.
3
Press the G or g button to change the value.
You can also use the + or – button.
To place VITC on another position, repeat the
procedure above, pressing the [F10] (VITC POS-2)
button in Steps 1 and 3 instead of the [F9] (VITC
POS-1) button.
Press the [F7] (CHARA H-POS) or [F8] (CHARA
V-POS) button.
The data setting is completed and the data entry
window disappears.
Switching to another menu also completes the data
setting.
4-26
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Press the [F9] (VITC POS-1) button.
The data setting is completed and the data entry
window disappears.
Switching to another menu also completes the data
setting.
4-4 CUE Menu
For details on storing cue point data, refer to “4-1-5 IC
Memory Card Function” on page 4-6.
The BKDW-515 allows you to register up to 100 cue
points (0 to 99), and to manage cue points in groups of
10 (per page).
Cue point settings, deletions, and page settings are
done through the CUE menu.
To activate the CUE menu
Press the CUE button.
Data entry window
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
Page number indication
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
CUE
P-ROLL
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
Title
Cue point indication
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CUENUM
SET
CUE menu display
CUE menu
Button
Indication
Function
[F1]
PREV PAGE
Shows the previous page.
[F2]
NEXT PAGE
Shows the next page.
[F5]
CUE P-ROLL
Specifies the preroll time to a cue point.
[F8]
PAGE SET
Specifies the page number.
[F9]
CUENUM SET
Specifies the cue number.
ALT/[F8]
PAGE MODE
Selects PAGE mode.
ALT/[F9]
EXTEND MODE
Selects EXTEND mode.
Settings
0 to 30 s
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-27
4-4 CUE Menu
4-4-1 Selecting a Multi-Cue Mode
The BKDW-515 has the following two multi-cue
modes.
PAGE mode
Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE MODE)
button.
In PAGE mode, cue point data can be accessed by
page number, thus speeding up cue point registration
and cuing operations.
4-4-2 Registering Cue Points
There are two ways to register cue points: (1) by direct
registration of the tape address where the ENTRY
button is pressed, and (2) by the entry of cue point data
with the numeric buttons.
Registering cue points by pressing the
ENTRY button
2
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Display
Cue points are displayed in groups of 10, number 0 to
9, 10 to 19, etc. Each display is a page.
Selecting a page
There are the three following ways to select a page:
• Press the [F1] (PREV PAGE) button.
The previous page is shown.
• Press the [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button.
The next page is shown.
• Enter the desired page number with the numeric
button, then press the [F8] (PAGE SET) button.
If you enter 1, for example, page one appears,
containing cue point numbers 10 to 19.
1
Registering cue points by pressing the ENTRY button
1
2
EXTEND mode
Press the ALT button, then the [F9] (EXTEND
MODE) button.
In EXTEND mode, you can do operations that cannot
be done in page units, such as the consecutive
registration of more than 10 cue points.
Display
The screen displays a list of 100 consecutive cue
points which can be scrolled. Press the G or g button
to scroll the list. Page columns are not displayed.
3
Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
If you selected PAGE mode, press the ALT button,
then the [F1] (PREV PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT
PAGE) button (or use the numeric buttons to enter
the page number in the data entry window, then
press the ALT button again, then the [F8] (PAGE
SET) button).
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number to be registered.
NEXT
PÅGE
CUE
P-ROLL
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
To quickly scroll a list
Press the G or g button while holding down the SFT
button.
4-28
4
53
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
CUENUM
SET
To select the cue number directly by
numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
4
5
Registering cue points by the numeric
buttons
2
Press the JOG or VAR button, then rotate the
search dial to find the position where you want to
register the cue point.
Press the ENTRY button at the selected position.
The current tape address of the position where the
button is pressed is registered as a cue point.
Press the ENTRY button repeatedly to register the
cue point repeatedly. The cue number will
automatically increment by one each time.
NEXT
PÅGE
CUE
P-ROLL
1
Registering cue points by the numeric buttons
1
TCR 01:00:30:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
2
CUENUM
SET
3
Note
In PAGE mode, each time you press the ENTRY
button to register a cue point more than once, the cue
number automatically increments on the page. For
example, after registering cue point No. 19 on page 1,
the next cue point is registered to cue point No.10. In
EXTEND mode, if you press the ENTRY button after
registering, for example, cue point No.99, the next cue
point is registered to cue point No.99 again.
53
Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
If you selected PAGE mode, press the ALT button,
then the [F1] (PREV PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT
PAGE) button (or use the numeric buttons to enter
the page number in the data entry window, then
press the [F8] (PAGE SET) button).
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number to be registered.
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
CUE
P-ROLL
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
CUENUM
SET
To select the cue number directly by the
numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-29
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
4
4-4 CUE Menu
4
Enter the cue point data in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the SET
button.
For example, to enter 01:30:00:00, press 1, 3, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When the
entered value is less than eight digits, the leading
digit(s) is (are) set to 0 when you press the SET
button.)
CUE
SET
01 00 30 00
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
PREV
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CUE
P-ROLL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
4-4-3 Erasing Cue Point Data
To erase any cue point data, blank out the data entry
window, then do the cue point registration procedure.
2
Entered data
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
1
Erasing cue point data
To modify current cue point data
Press the + or – button, enter the value to be added
or subtracted, then press the SET button. The
computation is performed and the results appear in
the data entry window.
Press the ENTRY button to set the entered data.
The data are registered in the cue point data
indication.
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
CUE
P-ROLL
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
53
CUENUM
SET
1
5
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:00:00:00
01:00:30:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
CUENUM
SET
2
3
Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
If you selected PAGE mode, press the ALT button,
then the [F1] (PREV PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT
PAGE) button (or use the numeric buttons to enter
the page number in the data entry window, then
press the [F8] (PAGE SET) button).
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number to be erased.
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
CUE
P-ROLL
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
]
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:00:00:00
01:00:30:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
CUENUM
SET
To select the cue number directly by
the numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
4-30
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4
Press the CLR button then the SET button.
“SET” appears in a blank data entry window.
CUE
SET
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
PREV
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
CUE
P-ROLL
Data entry
window
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
4-4-4 Prerolling to a Cue Point
Set the [F5] (CUE P-ROLL) button to specify the
preroll time to a cue point.
You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1second units.
Prerolling to a cue point
CUENUM
SET
2
5
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
CUE
P-ROLL
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Press the ENTRY button.
Data for the specified cue number are erased and
the data column becomes blank.
1
TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
PÅGE: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
PÅGE
SET
Erased cue point
Prerolling to a cue point
1
CUENUM
SET
2
To erase all cue point data
Press the CLR button while holding down the SFT
button. A message asking you to confirm the
operation appears in the display. In EXTEND
mode, press the CLR button while holding down
the SFT button again to erase all data for cue
points No. 0 to No. 99. In PAGE mode, press the
CLR button while holding down the SFT button
again to erase data for the cue points on the current
page.
34
3
Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
If you selected PAGE mode, press the ALT button,
then the [F1] (PREV PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT
PAGE) button (or use the numeric buttons to enter
the page number in the data entry window, then
press the [F8] (PAGE SET) button).
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number.
To select the cue number directly by the
numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
4
Press the PREROLL button.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-31
4-4 CUE Menu
4-4-5 Changing a Cue Point Into
an Edit Point
Follow the procedure below to change any cue point
into an edit point.
To change an edit point into an IN point
Press the SET button while hoding down the IN
button.
To change an edit point into an OUT point
Press the SET button while holding down the OUT
button.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
To change an edit point into an AUDIO IN
point
Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO
IN button.
To change an edit point into an AUDIO OUT
point
Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO
OUT button.
AUDIO IN button AUDIO OUT button
IN button
SET button
OUT button
4-32
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-4-6 Backspace Editing
You can perform backspace editing with the CUE
menu. In backspace editing, assemble editing is
performed from the recording end point. Since the
data specifying recording end point are cleared when
you eject the tape, after inserting a tape, you must
record for at least one minute or so on the tape before
you can do backspace editing. After recording, the
present end of the recorded position becomes the
recording end point. When you press the AUTO
EDIT button afterwards, the VTR automatically
prerolls a few seconds before the recording end point
and starts assemble editing. If no data for the
recording end point exist, backspace editing is not
performed.
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)
For details on registration methods, refer to “4-1-3
Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3, and on
restoring factory-set menu items, refer to “4-1-4 VTR
Memory Bank Function” on page 4-4.
To activate the PF1 menu screen
Press the PF1 button.
D O L B Y N R CH.COND DIGITÅL PF1
VIDEO
IN
sif
LOCK
TCR
OUT
REF
ref
PLÅY
4FD F1
00Ó 00µ 00ß 00ƒ
ÅIN --:--:--:-- ÅOUT --:--:--:-IN --:--:--:-OUT --:--:--:--
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
PROC
CONTRL
rmt
VIDEO
GÅIN
prst
CHROMÅ
GÅIN
SETUP
LEVEL
Y/C
DELÅY
prst
prst
prst
CHROMÅ SYSTEM SYSTEM
PHÅSE
SYNC
SC
prst
prst
prst
PF1 menu display
PF1 menu (factory settings)
Button
Indication
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
The PF (Personal Function) 1 menu is used to register
frequently used menu items.
When shipped from the factory, the PF1 menu contains
the adjustment menu for video signals. If you later use
the PF1 menu to register items from other menus, you
can restore the PF1 menu to its original factory settings
by recalling SETUP BANK [F] from the VTR memory
banks.
Function
Settings
[F1]
VIDEO IN
Selects the input video signal.
sif, cmpst, y-r/b
[F2]
OUT REF
Selects the reference signal for output.
ref, input
[F3]
PROC CONTRL
Switches the control of the digital video processor.
menu, local, rmt
[F4]
VIDEO GAIN
Adjusts the output level of the video output signal.
prst, 0 to B50H
[F5]
CHROMA GAIN
Adjusts the chroma output level.
prst, 0 to B50H
[F6]
SETUP LEVEL (DVWA500/1 and 500/1 only)
Adjusts the setup level.
prst, 0 to 220H
BLACK LEVEL (DVWAdjusts the black level.
A500P/1 and 500P/1 only)
prst, 0 to 220H
[F7]
Y/C DELAY(DVW-A500/1 Adjusts the Y/C delay during analog Betacam playback.
series only)
prst, 0 to FFFH
[F8]
CHROMA PHASE
Adjusts the chroma phase.
prst, 0 to FFH
[F9]
SYSTEM SYNC
Adjusts the system sync phase.
prst, 0 to FFH
[F10]
SYSTEM SC
Adjusts the system sub-carrier phase.
prst, 0 to 3FFH
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-33
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)
4-5-1 Selecting the Input Video
Signal (VIDEO IN)
Press the [F1] (VIDEO IN) button repeatedly to select
the video signal to input.
sif: Serial digital video signal input to the SERIAL V/
A INPUT connector
cmpst: Analog composite video signal input to the
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connector
y-r/b: Analog component video signal input to the
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT connectors
Note
Changing the PROC CONTRL setting during playback
may cause a momentary interruption in the sound
output.
4-5-4 Adjusting the Output Video
Signal (VIDEO GAIN to SYSTEM
SC)
Adjusting the output video signal
4-5-2 Selecting the Reference
Signal (OUT REF)
Follow the procedure below to adjust the output video
signal.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Press the [F2] (OUT REF) button to select the signal to
be used as the reference signal for VTR operations.
ref: The signal input to the REF.VIDEO INPUT
connector is used as the reference signal for
playback and audio recording. Digital audio and
video input signals must synchronize with this
reference signal during recording.
input: The video input signal is used as the reference
signal for VTR operations. The [F1] (VIDEO IN)
button switches the video input signal.
1,3
2
Adjusting the output video signal
4-5-3 Switching the Control of
the Digital Video Processor
(PROC CONTRL)
Press the [F3] (PROC CONTRL) button to select the
method for operating the internal digital video
processor.
menu: Select this setting when adjusting the settings
of the internal digital video processor through the
PF1 menu or items 715 to 721 of the VTR SETUP
menu.
local: Select this setting when controlling the
internal digital processor from the control panel of
the VTR.
rmt: Select this setting when using the optional
BVR-50 Remote Controller to remotely control
the internal digital video processor.
For details on items 715 to 721 of the VTR SETUP menu,
refer to Menu List on page A-28.
4-34
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
1
2
Press the function button ([F4] to [F10]) whose
setting you wish to set.
The setting display section lights up.
Change the numerical value by pressing the G or
g button (or + or – button).
To change the value quickly, press the buttons
while holding down the SFT button.
To set the preset value
Press the center cursor button.
PRST appears over the respective function button.
3
Press the function button after adjusting the
numerical value.
Adjusting the output level
Make this adjustment with the [F4] (VIDEO GAIN)
button.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to B50H
Adjustable range: –3 to +3 (dB)
The range of the numerical value may be adjusted
through 714. VIDEO ADJUST RANGE of the VTR
SETUP menu. The range is ±3 dB when controlling
the VTR from a device (such as a BVR-50) connected
to the VIDEO CONTROL connector in the connector
panel.
Make this adjustment with the [F5] (CHROMA GAIN)
button.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to B50H
Adjustable range: –3 to +3 (dB)
The range of the numerical value may be adjusted
through 716. CHROMA GAIN of the VTR SETUP
menu. The range is ±3 dB when controlling the VTR
from a device (such as a BVR-50) connected to the
VIDEO CONTROL connector in the connector panel.
Adjusting the setup level/black level
DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 only
Adjust the setup level with the [F6] (SETUP LEVEL)
button.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to 220H
Adjustable range: –30 to +30 (IRE)
DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1 only
Adjust the black level with the [F6] (BLACK LEVEL)
button.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to 220H
Adjustable range: –210 to +210 (mV)
Make this adjustment with the [F7] (Y/C DELAY)
button.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to FFFH
Adjustable range: –100 to +100 (ns)
Adjusting the chroma phase
Set the hue (the relative phase between burst and
chroma) with the [F8] (CHROMA PHASE) button.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to FFH
Adjustable range: –30 to +30 ( ˚ )
Adjusting the system synchronization
phase
Make this adjustment to match the output phase of the
VTR precisely to that of the reference signal, or to
create special effects as fading, wrapping, and
dissolving through connection with a switcher, and in
conjunction with other VTRs.
The [F9] (SYSTEM SYNC) button sets the sync phase
of the output signal relative to the reference signal
input to the VTR.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to FFH
Adjustable range: –15 to +15 (µs)
Adjusting the system sub-carrier phase
Make this adjustment to precisely match the output
phase of the VTR relative to the phase of the reference
signal with the level of the sub-carrier phase during
editing using composite signals. This adjustment
keeps the SCH (Sub-Carrier Sync) phase of the output
constant.
The [F10] (SYSTEM SC) button sets the sync and subcarrier phases of the output signal relative to the
reference signal input to the VTR.
prst: Selects the standard setting.
Numerical value: 0 to 3FFH
Adjustable range: –200 to +200 (ns)
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-35
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Adjusting the chroma output level
Adjusting the Y/C delay during analog
Betacam playback (DVW-A500/1 series
only)
4-6
PF2
(Factory
4-6
PF2
MenuMenu
(Factory
Settings)
Settings)
The PF2 menu is used to register frequently used menu
items.
When shipped from the factory, the PF2 menu contains
the adjustment menu for audio signals. If you later use
the PF2 menu to register items from other menus, you
can restore the PF2 menu to its original factory settings
by recalling SETUP BANK [F] from the VTR memory
banks.
Å-IN
CH1
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Å-IN
CH3
To activate the PF2 menu screen
Press the PF2 button.
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL P F 2
sif
Å-IN
CH2
sif
For details on registration methods, refer to “4-1-3
Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3, and on
restoring factory-set menu items, refer to “4-1-4 VTR
Memory Bank Function” on page 4-4.
LOCK
TCR
PLÅY
4FD F1
00Ó 00µ 00ß 00ƒ
ÅIN --:--:--:-- ÅOUT --:--:--:-IN --:--:--:-OUT --:--:--:--
sif
Å-IN
CH4
sif
DOLBY
NR
EMPHÅSIS
MON-L
SEL
MON-R
SEL
on
off
1____
1____
PF2 menu display
PF2 menu (factory settings)
Button
Indication
Function
Settings
[F1]
A-IN CH1
Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 1.
sif, aes/ebu, analg
[F2]
A-IN CH2
Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 2.
sif, aes/ebu, analg
[F3]
A-IN CH3
sif, aes/ebu, analg
[F4]
A-IN CH4
Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 3.
Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 4.
sif, aes/ebu, analg
[F5]
[F6]
DOLBY NR (DVWA500/1 series only)
Sets the Dolby NR1).
on, off
[F7]
EMPHASIS
Sets the emphasis.
off, on
[F9]
MON-L SEL
Selects the monitor output signal for channel L.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
[F10]
MON-R SEL
Selects the monitor output signal for channel R.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) Dolby NR (Noise Reduction)
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY”
and the double-D symbol a are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
4-36
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-6-1 Selecting the Audio Input
Signal (A-IN ALL to A-IN CH4)
Function buttons [F1] (A-IN CH1) to [F4] (A-IN CH4)
select the audio input signal for the various channels.
sif: Selects the audio signal input through the
SERIAL V/A INPUT connector.
aes/ebu: Selects the audio signal input through the
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors.
analg: Selects the audio signal input through the
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connectors.
The Dolby NR (noise reduction) C system, which is
used for cue audio tracks, can be turned on or off only
when using an oxide tape. The system automatically
turns on when using a metal tape. Press the [F6]
(DOLBY NR) button to change the DOLBY NR
setting.
on: Select this setting to play an analog Betacam
oxide tape with the Dolby NR system.
off: Select this setting to play an analog Betacam
oxide tape without the Dolby NR system.
The [F9] (MON-L SEL) and [F10] (MON-R SEL)
buttons allow you to specify the audio channel to be
output from the left and right MONITOR OUTPUT
connectors, respectively.
1: Audio channel 1
2: Audio channel 2
3: Audio channel 3
4: Audio channel 4
5: Analog cue channel
When multiple channels are selected for a single
connector, all of the numbers are displayed.
Select the output signal to be monitored as follows:
1
2
3
4-6-3 Setting Emphasis
(EMPHASIS)
Press the [F9] (MON-L SEL) or [F10] (MON-R
SEL) button. The setting display section lights up.
Press numeric buttons 1 to 4 to select audio
channels 1 to 4, or numeric button 5 for the analog
cue channel.
Example: Pressing numeric buttons 1 and 2 selects
audio channels 1 and 2, leaving audio channels 3
and 4, and the analog cue channel off.
“12...” appears in the display.
To set the entered audio channels, press the
respective function button ([F9] or [F10]).
To emphasize to a digital audio signal that has been
converted from an analog audio input signal, set the
[F7] (EMPHASIS) button to on.
This setting also allows you to emphasize while
digitizing a playback audio signal from a conventional
Betacam cassette.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-37
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-6-2 Setting the Dolby NR
System (DOLBY NR) (DVW-A500/
1 Series Only)
4-6-4 Selecting the Monitor
Output Signal (MON-L SEL/MONR SEL)
4-7
UP
4-7
SETSET
UP Menu
Menu
In the SET UP menu, you can store and recall menu
settings to and from the VTR memory banks and IC
memory card, register items to the PF menu, and set
items in the VTR SETUP menu and PANEL SETUP
menu.
To activate the SET UP menu
Press the SET UP button.
To change the SET UP menu page
Press the ALT button.
For details on storing and recalling data to or from the VTR
memory banks or IC memory card, and registering items to
the PF menus, refer to “4-1 Registering and Storing Menu
Settings” on page 4-1.
“$” indicates that more than
one menu page exists.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
C H . C O N D ÅNÅLOG S E T U P
current setup name
TCR 00:00:04:10
SETUP MENU
MEMORY
VTR BÅNK: Copy data between
[
F
1
]
CÅRD
current setup and 8 banks.
[ F 2 ]M E M O R Y C Å R D : C o p y d a t a
between VTR and memory card.
[ F 4 ]P F 1 & 2 Å S S I G N : Å s s i g n P F 1 / P F 2
menu function keys.
[ F 5 ]P Å N E L S E T U P : P a n e l s e t t i n g
[
F
6
]
VTR SETUP: VTR current setup
PF1&2
ÅSSIGN
VTR
BÅNK
PÅNEL
SETUP
VTR
SETUP
REMOTE REMOTE
9-PIN 50-PIN
off
off
SET UP menu display
SET UP menu
Button
Indication
Function
[F1]
VTR BANK
Refer to “4-1-4 VTR Memory Bank Function” on page 4-4.
[F2]
MEMORY CARD Refer to “4-1-5 IC Memory Card Function” on page 4-6.
[F4]
PF1&2 ASSIGN
Refer to “4-1-3 Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3.
[F5]
PANEL SETUP
Refer to “4-7-2 PANEL SETUP Menu” on page 4-42.
[F6]
VTR SETUP
Refer to “4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu” on page 4-40.
[F8]
REMOTE 9-PIN
Selects remote operation through a device connected to the REMOTE1IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors.
[F9]
REMOTE 50-PIN Selects remote operation using a device (optional BKDW-509)
connected to the REMOTE PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector.
on, off
ALT/[F9]
AUDIO SG
Sets the audio test signal.
on, off
ALT/[F10]
VIDEO SG
Sets the video test signal.
on, off
4-38
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Settings
on, off
Selecting remote operation mode
When operating the VTR with an external device, set
the [F8] (REMOTE 9-PIN) button or [F9] (REMOTE
50-PIN) button to on.
When the [F8] (REMOTE 9-PIN) button is set to
on
You can operate the VTR with a device connected to
the REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
When the [F9] (REMOTE 50-PIN) button is set
to on
You can operate the VTR with a device (optional
BKDW-509) connected to the REMOTE PARALLEL
I/O(50P) connector.
Note
When operating the VTR through an external device,
all of the tape operation and editing buttons are
disabled, with the exception of the STOP and EJECT
buttons. You may also set the VTR so that all buttons
are enabled or disabled. Perform this setting through
006. LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE of the VTR
SETUP menu. You cannot, however, disable the menu
and remote operation mode selection buttons.
Setting the test signal
To turn on the internal test signal generator, press the
ALT button, then set the [F9] (AUDIO SG) button to
on, or press the ALT button, then set the [F10]
(VIDEO SG) button to on.
Select the audio test signal through 808. INTERNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR and the video test
signal through 710. INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL
GENERATOR in the VTR SETUP menu.
Note
Setting the test signal to OFF in item 710 or 808 in the
VTR SETUP menu turns off the [F9] (AUDIO SG)
button or [F10] (VIDEO SG) button, respectively.
To turn on the test signal generator, select the test
signal on respective item again, turning on the [F9]
(AUDIO SG) button or [F10] (VIDEO SG) button.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-39
4-7 SET UP Menu
4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu
All menu items required for setting up the VTR
operating conditions are displayed in the scrollable
VTR SETUP menu.
Items which are frequently used can be registered in
the PF1/2 menus. Those items that can be registered in
a PF menu are displayed in the scrollable PF1&2
ASSIGN menu.
To activate the VTR SETUP menu
Press the SET UP button, then press the [F6] (VTR
SETUP) button.
For details on the VTR SETUP menu items, refer to “Menu
List” on page A-7.
For details on registering items to the PF1/2 menus, refer to
“4-1-3 Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
VTR SETUP
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT
TCR 00:00:00:00
CURRENT SETUP MENU
603:ID CODE SET - Djs
605:TCG REGEN
- TC&UB
606:TC OUT SIG. - Tape
607:BINÅRY GP
- 000
608:PHÅSE CORR. - off
609:TCG CF FLÅG - off
610:REGEN MODE
- as&in
611:TC RGN SRC
- LTC
701:EE DELÅY
- as&in
703:BLÅNK LINE
704:DEC MODE
CHÅNGE
SÅVE/
DÅTÅ
EXIT
PREV
CÅTEG
NEXT
CÅTEG
MULTI
LOOP
OFF
VTR SETUP menu display
VTR SETUP menu
Button
Indication
Function
[F1]
PREV CATEG
Move to the beginning of the previous category.
[F2]
NEXT CATEG
Move to the beginning of the next category.
[F4]
MULTI LOOP
Multi-loop
[F7]
CHANGE DATA
Changes the setting.
SAVE/EXIT
Sets the value and exits the VTR SETUP menu.
[F9]
[F10]
4-40
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Scrolling items in the VTR SETUP menu
2
Press the [F7] (CHANGE DATA) button.
The window for changing settings appears.
Press the G and g to scroll the items in the VTR
SETUP menu.
To search the menu by category
Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into
Menu
number
Category
Hs
Items related to the hours meter
000s
Items related to VTR operations
CURRENT SETUP ITEM-610
REGEN ÅUTO MODE
assem & insert
Items related to operation panels
Items related to remote interface
300s
Items related to editing
400s
Items related to prerolling
500s
Items related to recording protection
600s
Items related to the time code generator
700s
Items related to the video control
800s
Items related to the audio control
900s
Items related to digital process
Ks
Items set by switches on models DVW-A500,
A500P, 500, and 500P
3
4
SÅVE/
EXIT
Press the [F7] (CHANGE DATA) button
repeatedly to select the new setting.
When sub-items appear, change the setting as
required with the G or g button, then press the
[F7] (CHANGE DATA) button repeatedly.
Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.
The new value is set and the window for changing
settings disappears.
categories according to type of settings they perform.
Pressing the [F1] (PREV CATEG) button selects the
first item of the previous category.
Pressing the [F2] (NEXT CATEG) button selects the
first item of the next category.
5
6
Changing settings
To activate the multi-loop function
Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to change more settings.
Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button again.
The new settings are saved and the SETUP menu
display appears again.
Press the [F4] (MULTI LOOP) button repeatedly to
select the setting.
Note
The [F4] (MULTI LOOP) button is operative only
when the cursor is positioned on a 700s item (related
to the video control) in the VTR SETUP menu.
2,3 4
1
The muti-loop function is automatically cancelled
when the control panel exits the VTR SETUP menu.
Changing settings
1
Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the item to be changed.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-41
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
100s
200s
CHÅNGE
DÅTÅ
4-7 SET UP Menu
4-7-2 PANEL SETUP Menu
The PANEL SETUP menu is used to set the operation
conditions of the upper and lower control panels.
KEYINH
off
To activate the PANEL SETUP menu
Press the SET UP button, then press the [F5] (PANEL
SETUP) button.
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL P Å N E L S E T U P
current setup name
TCR 00:00:04:08
PÅNEL SETUP MENU
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
KEY
BEEP
ÅLÅRM
BEEP
SCREEN
SÅVER
off
high
10min
EXIT
PANEL SETUP menu display
PANEL SETUP menu
Button
Indication
Function
Settings
[F1]
KEYINH
Disables all button operations.
on, off
[F6]
KEY BEEP
Sets the keyboard sound.
high, low, off
[F7]
ALARM BEEP
Sets the alarm.
high, low, off
[F8]
SCREEN SAVER
Sets the screen-saver.
3min, 10min, 60min, off
[F10]
EXIT
Exits the PANEL SETUP menu.
4-42
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
Disabling the upper and lower control
panel buttons
Set the [F1] (KEYINH) button to on.
You can select buttons to be disabled through 118.
KEY INHIBIT SWITCH EFFECTIVE AREA in the
VTR SETUP menu.
Setting the keyboard sound
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Press the [F6] (KEY BEEP) button repeatedly.
high: The keyboard sound is loud.
low: The keyboard sound is weak.
off: The keyboard sound is off.
Setting the alarm
Press the [F7] (ALARM BEEP) button repeatedly.
high: The alarm sound is loud.
low: The alarm sound is weak.
off: The alarm sound is off.
Setting the elapsed time until screensaver activated time
Press the [F8] (SCREEN SAVER) button repeatedly.
3min: The screen-saver goes on 3 minutes after the
last button operation.
10min: The screen-saver goes on 10 minutes after
the last button operation.
60min: The screen-saver goes on 60 minutes after
the last button operation.
off: The screen-saver function is off.
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
4-43
4-7 SET UP Menu
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-44
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
5-1 Preparing for Recording
Before recording, set the switches and menus as shown
in the diagram below.
For details, refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses.
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons:
Audio channels to be recorded (page 5-2)
REC level controls: Reference level or
appropriate recording level (page 5-3)
VIDEO INPUT SELECT buttons: Input
signals to be recorded
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-1-1 Setting Switches and Menus
REMOTE buttons: None of these
buttons light up.
POWER switch: ON
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Menu settings
[F2] (CONFI) button in the HOME menu: off for normal use.
ALT/[F1] (REC INH) buttons in the HOME menu: off
ALT/[F2] (PB/EE) buttons in the HOME menu: PB/EE
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: Select the time data to be displayed.
[F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu: int or ext (page 4-21)
[F7] (TCG MODE) button in the TC menu: regen or prst (page 4-22)
[F10] (VITC) button in the TC menu: on when recording VITC; off when not recording
Setting switches and menus
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-1
5-1 Preparing for Recording
5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals
This section describes how to select the audio signals
for input and monitoring.
For details on switch and menu settings, refer to “5-1-1
Setting Switches and Menus” on the previous page.
Selecting the audio input signals
For details, refer to “4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)” on
page 4-36.
Selecting audio signals to be monitored
Press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select
the audio signals output to the PHONES jack and the
MONITOR OUTPUT L and R connectors.
Press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select
the audio input signal and channels.
2
1
1
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Selecting audio signals to be monitored
2
1
Selecting the audio input signals
1
2
Press the INPUT SELECT button so that it lights
up.
The AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
button(s) light(s) up to indicate the audio input
signal type and the currently selected audio
channel.
Select the signals to be input and the channels by
pressing the following buttons:
• SIF CH-1 to CH-4 buttons: Select audio channels
1 to 4 input through the SERIAL V/A INPUT
connector.
• AES/EBU CH-1 to CH-4: Select audio channels
1 to 4 input through the AUDIO INPUT (AES/
EBU) connectors.
• ANALOG CH-1 to CH-4 and CUE buttons:
Select audio channels 1 to 4 and cue channel
input through the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT
connectors.
This specification can also be done by setting the
[F1] (A-IN CH1) to [F4] (A-IN CH4) buttons in the
PF2 menu.
5-2
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
2
Press the MONITOR SELECT button so that it
lights up.
The AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
button(s) light(s) up to indicate the audio input
signal type and the channel(s) being monitored.
Press the button(s) for the audio signal and the
channel(s) to be output to the PHONES jack and
the MONITOR OUTPUT L and/or R connector(s).
This specification can also be done by setting the
[F9] (MON-L SEL) and [F10] (MON-R SEL)
buttons in the PF2 menu.
For details, refer to “4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)” on
page 4-36.
To adjust the audio output level of the
PHONES jack
Rotate the PHONES level control on the upper control
panel.
To adjust the audio output level of the
MONITOR OUTPUT connectors
You can make an initial settings to allow the audio
output level of the MONITOR OUTPUT connector to
be adjusted with the PHONES level control on the
upper control panel.
For details, refer to “1-9. SWITCH SETTINGS ON THE
CONNECTOR PANEL AND BOARDS” in the Installation
and Maintenance Manual.
5-1-3 Adjusting the Audio
Recording Level
Adjusting the recording level
Selecting the display range of the audio
level meters
You can switch the range of audio level meters display
by pressing the DISPLAY FULL/FINE button on the
upper control panel.
FULL mode: The meter range is –60 to 0 dB or –40
to +20 dB.
FINE mode: The meter scale is enlarged, and the
signal level is indicated in 0.25 dB steps, with the
reference marker indicated by a lit LED in the
middle of each meter.
This specification can also be done by setting 806.
LEVEL METER SCALE in the VTR SETUP menu.
Recording with the specific recording level
Pull out the REC level controls for the appropriate
channels and rotate them so that the audio level meters
indicate approximately 0 dB for the average audio
signal input level.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Recording with the reference level
If the REC level controls on the upper control panel
are pushed in, audio signals are recorded at the
reference level (0 dB reference level indicated in the
audio level meters for +4 dBm input).
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button
Selecting the display range of the audio level meters
REC level controls
Adjusting the recording level
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-3
5-1 Preparing for Recording
5-1-4 Monitoring Simultaneous
Playback of Video and Audio
Signals Being Recorded
Monitoring signals being recorded
To monitor audio and video signals currently being
recorded, press the HOME button, then select on by
pressing the [F2] (CONFI) button.
You can also set the VTR to play back the section of
tape before and after the edit portion with the CONFI
heads during editing.
For details, refer to “4-2-2 Simultaneous Playback During
Recording (CONFI)” on page 4-14.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Monitoring previously recorded video and
audio signals while recording
To monitor previously recorded audio and video
signals while recording (preread function), press the
[F1] (PRE READ) button while holding down the SFT
button in the HOME menu.
For details, refer to “4-2-1 Setting the Preread Function
(PRE READ)” on page 4-14.
5-4
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
5-1-5 Recording Analog Audio
Recording with emphasis
You can emphasize analog audio signals that are
recorded from the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT
connectors. By emphasizing signals during recording,
then de-emphasizing them during playback, high
frequency noise can be suppressed without affecting
the original signal.
To record with emphasis, select on by pressing the [F7]
(EMPHASIS) button in the PF2 menu (factory
setting).
The signals recorded with emphasis are automatically
de-emphasized during playback regardless of the
setting of the [F7] (EMPHASIS) button.
5-2 Recording
To record, follow the procedure below.
1
3 2
Recording
1
Check that the REC INHIBIT indicator is off, then
insert a cassette.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
For details on inserting a cassette, refer to “3-3-2
Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes” on page 3-7.
2
3
Press the PLAY button while holding down the
REC button.
Recording starts and the SERVO indicator lights
up to indicate that the servo is locked.
Press the STOP button to stop recording.
If the recording continues to the end of the
tape
The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and
stops.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-5
5-1
Preparing
for Recording
5-3
Preparing
for Playback
5-3-1 Setting Switches and Menus
Before starting playback, set the switches and menus
as shown in the diagram below.
For details, refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses.
POWER switch: ON
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons:
Audio channels to be monitored (page 5-2)
PB level controls:
Playback level
REMOTE buttons: None of
these buttons light up.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Menu settings
ALT/[F2] (PB/EE) buttons in the HOME menu: PB
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: Select the time data to be displayed.
[F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu: int
[F7] (TCG MODE) button in the TC menu: Select the time code to be output. (page 4-21)
Setting switches and menus
5-3-2 Adjusting the Audio
Playback Level
If the PB level controls on the upper control panel are
pushed in, audio signals are output at the factory-set
level (+4 dBm output for signals recorded at the 0 dB
reference level).
To adjust the audio playback level
manually
Pull and rotate the PB level control for the
corresponding channel.
For details on changing the factory-set reference output
level, refer to “1-9. SWITCH SETTINGS ON THE
CONNECTOR PANEL AND BOARDS” in the Installation
Manual.
PB level controls
To adjust the audio playback level manually
5-6
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
5-4 Playback
There are five types of playback:
• Normal-speed playback
• Jog/Shuttle/Variable mode playback
• Capstan override playback
• DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback
• Program playback
5-4-1 Normal-Speed Playback
Follow the procedure below to play back at normal
speed.
Using Dolby noise reduction (DVW-A500/1
series only)
The VTR is equipped with the Dolby C noise
reduction system for analog Betacam and Betacam SP
playback.
To activate the Dolby C noise reduction system when
playing back an oxide tape, set the [F6] (DOLBY NR)
button in the PF2 menu (factory seting) to on.
During playback of a metal tape, however, the Dolby
C noise reduction system turns on no matter what this
setting is.
1
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
32
Normal-speed playback
1
Insert a cassette.
For details on inserting a cassette, refer to “3-3-2
Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes” on page 3-7.
2
3
Press the PLAY button.
Playback starts and the SERVO indicator lights up
to indicate that the servo is locked.
Press the STOP button to stop playback.
If playback continues to the end of the tape
The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and
stops.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-7
5-4 Playback
5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback in
Jog/Shuttle/Variable Modes
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
In Jog/Shuttle/Variable modes, you can change the
playback speed as follows:
Jog mode: The playback speed corresponds to the
rotational speed of the search dial, ranging from
–1 to +1 or –3 to +3 times normal playback speed
(selectable in VTR SETUP menu).
Shuttle mode: The playback speed corresponds to
the angle of rotation of the search dial, ranging
from –50 to +50 times normal speed when
playing back a Digital Betacam tape, and –35 to
+35 (DVW-A500/1 and 500/1 only) or –42 to +42
(DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1 only) times normal
speed when playing back an analog Betacam tape.
Variable mode: Playback speed is –1 times normal
speed when the search dial is rotated fully
counterclockwise, and +3 times normal speed
when rotated clockwise.
2
3
Rotate the search dial in the desired playback
direction and to the desired angle.
The tape is played back slowly, at a speed
corresponding to the rotational speed of the search
dial. A direction indicator (“ or ”) lights up to
indicate the direction of playback.
Stop rotating the search dial to stop jog mode
playback.
The p indicator lights up.
Note
The VTR is factory set so that pressing the search dial
switches the VTR between jog and shuttle modes,
however, you can set the VTR so that this function is
disabled.
For details on switching the search dial functions, refer
to“1-11. SEARCH DIAL MODE SWITCHING” in the
Installation Manual.
Shuttle mode playback
Jog mode playback
Follow the procedure below to play back in jog mode.
Follow the procedure below to play back in shuttle
mode.
1
1
3
1,2,3
Jog mode playback
1
Press the search dial or the JOG button so that the
JOG button lights up.
Pressing the dial toggles the VTR between jog
mode and shuttle mode. Either the JOG or
SHUTTLE button lights up to indicate the current
mode.
The p indicator lights up and the VTR enters stillpicture mode.
5-8
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
1,2,3
Shuttle mode playback
1
Press the search dial or the SHUTTLE button so
that the SHUTTLE button lights up.
Pressing the dial toggles the VTR between jog
mode and shuttle mode. Either the JOG or
SHUTTLE button lights up to indicate the current
mode.
The p indicator lights up and the VTR enters stillpicture mode.
After turning on the VTR, you should always set
the search dial to its center position. (The p
indicator, however, lights up when the VTR is
turned on, no matter what the position of the search
dial is.)
2
Rotate the search dial in the desired playback
direction and set the angle of rotation as required
to obtain the desired playback speed.
Variable mode playback
Follow the procedure below to play back in variable
mode.
Shuttle mode
1
–50 (–35 for DVW-A500/1
–50
and –42 for DVW-A500P/1
during analog Betacam or
Betacam SP playback)
+50
+50(+35 for DVW-A500/1
and +42 for DVW-A500P/1
during analog Betacan or
Betacam SP playback)
3
Variable mode playback
1
The setting of maximum speed of analog Betacam
or Betacam SP playback in shuttle mode can be
done in 102. MAXIMUM TAPE SPEED in the
VTR SETUP menu.
3
Set the search dial to center position for stillpicture, or press the STOP button to stop shuttle
mode playback.
2
Press the VAR button so that it lights up.
The p indicator lights up and the VTR enters stillpicture mode.
After turning on the VTR, you should always set
the search dial to its center position. (The p
indicator, however, lights up when the VTR is
turned on, no matter what the position of the search
dial is.)
Rotate the search dial in the desired playback
direction and set the angle of rotation as required
to achieve the desired playback speed.
To return to normal-speed playback
Press the PLAY button.
To alternate between normal-speed playback
and shuttle mode playback
After you have set the search dial to the angle that
corresponds to the desired playback speed, pressing
the PLAY button or SHUTTLE button selects normalspeed playback or shuttle mode playback, respectively.
To stop or start shuttle mode playback, press the STOP
button or SHUTTLE button, respectively.
Variable mode
–1
+3
The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds
to the angle of the search dial. A direction
indicator (“ or ”) lights up to indicate the
direction of playback.
The search dial clicks at the positions for stillpicture and normal-speed playback.
(Continued)
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-9
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds
to the angle of the search dial. A direction
indicator (“ or ”) lights up to indicate the
direction of playback.
The search dial clicks at the positions for stillpicture and ±10 times normal-speed playback.
2,3
5-4 Playback
3
Set the search dial to center position for stillpicture, or press the STOP button to stop variable
mode playback.
1
To return to normal-speed playback
Press the PLAY button
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
To alternate between normal-speed playback
and variable mode playback
After you have set the search dial to the angle that
corresponds to the desired playback speed, pressing
the PLAY button or VAR button selects normal-speed
playback or variable mode playback, respectively.
To stop or start variable mode playback, press the
STOP button or VAR button, respectively.
The VTR is factory set to enter jog or shuttle mode
during playback whenever you rotate the search dial.
You can set the VTR through 101. SELECTION FOR
SEARCH DIAL ENABLE in the VTR SETUP menu
so that pressing the JOG, SHUTTLE, or VAR button
and then rotating the search dial activates the
respective mode.
5-4-3 Capstan Override Playback
When playing back the same program on two VTRs,
you can adjust the playback phases of the two VTRs so
that they are synchronized.
There are two ways to make this adjustment:
(A) Using the search dial
(B) Using the +/– buttons
Note
When using method (A), change the system setup so
that jog/shuttle mode playback is inhibited even when
rotaing the search dial. Doing so prevents the VTR
from accidentally entering jog/shuttle mode during
capstan override playback. Make this setting through
101. SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE in
the VTR SETUP menu.
1(B)
1,2
Capstan override playback
5-10
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
1(A)
2
Use either method (A) or (B).
(A)Rotate the search dial while holding down the
PLAY button to adjust the playback speed.
The adjustment range is ±15% (in steps of 1%)
of the normal playback speed.
(B)Press the + or – button while holding down the
PLAY button to adjust the playback speed.
While the buttons are pressed, the playback
speed increases or decreases by 8%,
respectively.
During playback at increased or decreased speed,
the SERVO indicator goes off since the servo is
not locked (capstan override).
Release the PLAY button after you have finished
adjusting the phase.
The VTR returns to normal-speed playback and the
SERVO indicator lights up.
5-4-4 DMC Playback
Overview of DMC playback
DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback allows you
to vary the playback speed between –1 and +3 times
normal speed for certain sections of the tape, then store
the specified speed in memory for later playback.
For example, during a live broadcast of a sporting
event, you can set the start and end points of important
scenes while recording, and immediately play back
and broadcast those scenes using DMC playback.
Before performing DMC playback
Set 111. PROGRAM PLAY in the VTR SETUP menu
to disable.
Storing playback speeds in memory
5
Follow the procedure below to store playback speeds
in memory.
1
5
3
6
4
2
7
6
Storing playback speeds in memory
1
3
4
During playback or recording, press either of the
following buttons together with the ENTRY button
to set start and end points, respectively.
• On-air start point: AUDIO IN button
• Speed variation start point: IN button
• Speed variation end point: OUT button
• On-air end point: AUDIO OUT button
Press the search dial or the SHUTTLE button to
enter shuttle mode.
The SHUTTLE button lights up.
Rotate the search dial while holding down the
ALT/[F7] (DMC) button to select the initial
playback speed.
The selected speeds are shown in the time data
display window in the menu display as follows:
Playback speed
Display
Normal-speed playback
DMC-SPD PLAY
Still-picture playback
DMC-SPD STILL
Forward playback at 0.03
times normal speed
DMC-SPD +0.03
Reverse playback at 0.1
times normal speed
DMC-SPD –0.1
7
Rotate the search dial to the position for the
desired playback speed.
The speed variation is stored in memory while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing. The moment the
tape passes the speed variation end point, the
MEMORY indicator lights up continuously instead
to indicate that memorization of the playback
speed has completed.
The p indicator then disappears.
Press the STOP button to stop the tape.
If the MEMORY indicator lights up before the
tape reaches the speed variation end point
The VTR cannot store any further playback speed
variations. The capacity of the playback speed
memory is 120 seconds.
To confirm and change the stored speed
Press the PREVIEW button. The tape is played back
from the speed variation start point to the speed
variation end point at memorized speed. Rotate the
search dial to change the speed as required.
To set the initial speed to normal speed
Press the PLAY button in Step 4.
Notes on the p indicator and the MEMORY
indicator
The p indicator shows that the tape speed
memorization in DMC mode is taking place.
The MEMORY indicator flashes during playback
speed memorization, then lights continuously when
memorization of the playback speed has completed.
While the playback speed is being selected, the
tape does not move. Once the selection has been
made, release the [F7] (DMC) button.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-11
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
2
In HOME menu, press the ALT button, then set the
[F7] (DMC) button to on.
Press the PREVIEW button.
The tape is prerolled and played back at normal
speed from the preroll point to the speed variation
start point. The moment the tape passes the speed
variation start point, the MEMORY indicator in the
display starts flashing and the tape is played back
at the initial speed selected in Step 4.
The p indicator appears in the time data display
window, indicating that tape speed memorization
in DMC mode is active.
5-4 Playback
Performing DMC playback
There are two methods of starting DMC playback.
• Starting playback at the on-air cue from the on-air
start point
• Starting playback immediately after prerolling
Notes
• To avoid operation errors, we recommend that you
use the VTR alone when performing DMC playback.
• If two VTRs are connected for editing, you can still
perform DMC playback, but only on the recorder
VTR, and only when both the RECORDER and
PLAYER buttons are off.
1,2
To start playback immediately after prerolling
Press the PREVIEW button.
The PREVIEW button lights up. When the tape passes
the speed variation start point, DMC playback starts
and continues at the speed(s) stored in memory. When
the tape passes the speed variation end point, normalspeed playback resumes.
To stop the tape during DMC playback
Press the STOP button.
To exit DMC playback mode
Press the ALT/[F7] (DMC) button while holding down
the CLR button in HOME menu.
During DMC playback, the tape runs as shown in the
diagram below.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
On-air
Preroll
start
point point
$
$
Speed
variation
start point
$
Speed
variation
ending
point
$
On-air
end
point
$
Starting DMC playback at the on-air cue from the on-air start point
Press the REVIEW button.
Performing DMC playback
To start playback at the on-air cue from the
on-air start point
1
2
Press the REVIEW button.
The REVIEW button lights up and the tape is cued
up to the on-air start point. After the tape is cued
up, the REVIEW button flashes.
Press the REVIEW button again at the moment the
on-air cue is given.
The REVIEW button lights up. When the tape
passes the speed variation start point, DMC
playback starts and continues at the speed(s) stored
in memory. When the tape passes the speed
variation end point, normal-speed playback starts
and the tape stops at the on-air end point.
5-12
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
Stop
Normalspeed
playback
Press the
REVIEW
button again
at the on-air
cue.
DMC playback
Normalspeed
playback
Stop
Starting DMC playback immediately after preroll
Press the PREVIEW button.
Normalspeed
playback
Normal-speed
playback
DMC
playback
DMC playback
5-4-5 Program Playback
In program playback mode, you can play back a tape at
a previously determined speed. This speed may be set
within a range of normal playback speed ±15% (in
0.1% steps).
Installation of the optional BKDW-507 Audio
Program Play Board allows you to obtain higher
quality audio output during program playback.
Before performing program playback
Set 111. PROGRAM PLAY in the VTR SETUP menu
to enable.
Performing program playback
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
2
3
1
1
2
3
Press the search dial or the JOG button to light up
the JOG button, press the ALT button, and then
rotate the search dial while holding down the [F8]
(P-PLAY) button to specify the playback speed.
The adjustment range is ±15% normal playback
speed.
Press the PLAY button while holding down the
[F8] (P-PLAY) button.
The [F8] (P-PLAY) button lights up, and program
playback starts.
You can change the playback speed during
program playback by rotating the search dial while
holding down the [F8] (P-PLAY) button.
Press the STOP button to stop program playback.
Program play mode is canceled.
Note that the playback speed during program play
does not change until you change the playback
speed or you turn the power off. Normal playback
speed resumes when you turn the power off, then
on again.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-13
5-4 Playback
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-14
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Steps in automatic editing
The sequence of steps that are taken to do automatic
editing with two VTRs is as follows:
Automatic edit modes
The VTR provides the following two modes for
automatic editing:
• Assemble mode
New scenes are added to the end of previously
recorded scenes.
CTL signals, time codes, video and audio signals on
tape in the player are recorded onto tape in the
recorder VTR.
• Insert mode
New scenes are inserted into the middle of previously
recorded scenes. CTL signals on tape in the recorder
VTR are not overwritten. Video, digital audio, cue
audio, and time code signals can be recorded
separately.
Both of these two edit modes support DMC editing.
In insert mode, you can also use split editing.
Time codes recorded during automatic editing
During automatic editing, time codes recorded on the
tape always follow immediately after time codes
recorded right before an edit start point, regardless of
the setting of the [F6] (TCG SOURCE) and [F7] (TCG
MODE) buttons of TC menu.
Editing precautions
Using an editing control unit
When using an editing control unit to control the VTR,
set the edit delay on the control unit so that CUT-IN
and CUT-OUT commands are sent to the VTR five
frames ahead of the actual edit point.
Video signals output to a monitor
While in E-E mode or when playing back in edit mode,
the V-sync phase of the video output is delayed 6H (on
the DVW-A500/1 and 500/1) or 4H (on the DVWA500P/1 and 500P/1) with respect to the external
reference signal. You can also adjust the V-sync phase
so that it is in sync with the external reference signal
phase, but without affecting the video signal delay.
Change the V-sync phase through 701. SELECTION
OF VIDEO/SYNC DELAY in the VTR SETUP menu.
For details on the switch settings necessary for changing the
time codes recorded, refer to “4-3 TC Menu” on page 4-18
and the 600 menus in the VTR SETUP menu.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-1
Chapter 6 Editing
Interpolation of time codes by the CTL
counter
To use time codes as addresses of edit points, the time
codes must be recorded on the tape in ascending order.
As long as they are in ascending order, time codes do
not have to be continuous.
The CTL counter automatically interpolates data for
editing even if there are breaks in the continuity in the
time codes.
Select the edit mode (page 6-3).
.
Set edit points for the recorder and player VTR
(page 6-3).
.
Preview the edit section (page 6-8).
.
Perform the edit (page 6-11).
.
Confirm and modify the edit points
(pages 6-7 and 6-9).
.
Confirm the results of the edit (page 6-13).
Chapter 6 Editing
6-1-1 Overview of Automatic
Editing
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
6-1-2 Setting Switches and Menus
Before editing, set the following switches as shown
below.
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons or the [F1] (A-IN CH1)
to [F4] (A-IN CH4) buttons in the PF2 menu: input signal
Recorder VTR
VIDEO INPUT SELECT button or the [F1] (VIDEO
IN) button in the PF1 menu: input signal
POWER switch: ON
REC level controls: recording levels
REMOTE buttons: None of
these buttons light up.
Chapter 6 Editing
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu:
CTL or TC
Player VTR
POWER switch: ON
PB level controls:
playback levels
REMOTE buttons: 1(9P) button
lights up.
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: CTL or TC
Setting switches and menus
6-2
Chapter 6
Editing
6-1-3 Selecting the Edit Mode
Select assemble or insert mode.
[F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the HOME menu
6-1-4 Setting Edit Points
This section describes how to set edit points (IN and
OUT points). In insert mode, a technque called split
editing allows you to set edit points separately for
video and audio.
Positioning and setting edit points
To position and set edit points, follow the procedure
below.
[F4] (INS TC) to [F10] (INS CUE) buttons in the HOME menu
1
Selecting the edit mode
2
3
Positioning and setting edit points
1
2
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
Rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode to
position the edit point.
For details on jog or shuttle playback, refer to “5-4-2
Variable Speed Playback in Jog/Shuttle/Variable
Modes” on page 5-8.
3
4
Press the IN (or OUT) button while holding down
the ENTRY button.
The time data for the IN (or OUT) point appears in
the menu display.
Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to set the remaining edit
points.
When IN points are set for both the recorder and
player VTRs, the PREVIEW and AUTO EDIT
buttons flash to show that the VTR is ready for
preview or edit.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-3
Chapter 6 Editing
Press one of the following buttons to select the
respective edit mode:
• Assemble mode: [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the
HOME menu
• Insert mode: the appropriate INSERT button in
the HOME menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS
VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2),
[F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS
CUE))
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
3
Press the SET button to set the input data.
SET is
displayed.
2 CLR button 1
PRE
REÅD
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL H O M E
GREEN SET
01 00 30 00
off
LOCK
TCR
CONFI
off
ÅSSEMBLE
off
INS
TC
off
3
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
PLÅYER
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
1
2
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons.
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When
the entered value is less than eight digits, the
leading digit(s) are set to 0 when you press the
SET button.)
4
Press the IN (or OUT) button.
The time data for the IN (or OUT) point appears in
the menu display.
Note
If you set four or more points for the recorder and
player VTRs, a message will appear on the menu
display, indicating that editing is impossible. Delete
all unnecessary edit points by pressing the IN (OUT)
button while holding down the CLR button.
Chapter 6 Editing
For details, refer to “Deleting edit points” on page 6-9.
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL H O M E
GREEN
PRE
REÅD
off
off
ÅSSEMBLE
INS
TC
off
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
CONFI
off
Entered data are
displayed.
LOCK
TCR
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
PLÅYER
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
About automatic edit point setting
Editing requires a total of four edit points: IN and
OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs.
However, as soon as you set three edit points, the VTR
automatically sets the fourth point.
In the figure below, the points enclosed in a box have
been set manually, while the OUT point for the player
VTR has been set automatically.
To delete entered data
Press the CLR button.
Recorder VTR
IN point
OUT point
$
$
4
IN point
4
OUT point
Player VTR
Automatic edit point setting
6-4
Whether set manually or automatically, all edit points
can be changed or deleted at any time.
Chapter 6
Editing
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
Split editing
Positioning and setting edit points
Split editing allows you to set edit points separatelty
for video and audio. Set audio edit points with the
AUDIO IN/OUT buttons and video edit points with
the IN/OUT buttons.
Split editing, however, can only be done when the
recorder VTR is in insert mode.
3 CLR button 2
1
2
4
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
1
1
4
3
2
Positioning and setting edit points
1
3
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
To locate the edit points, rotate the search dial in
jog or shuttle mode.
3
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select
the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons.
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When
the entered value is less than eight digits, the
leading digit(s) are set to 0 when you press the SET
button.)
PRE
REÅD
off
ÅSSEMBLE
off
INS
TC
off
4
5
Press the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT)
button while holding down the ENTRY button.
Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to set the remaining edit
points.
Input data
are displayed.
LOCK
TCR
CONFI
off
For details on jog/shuttle/variable playback modes,
refer to “5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback in Jog/Shuttle/
Variable Modes” on page 5-8.
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL H O M E
GREEN
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
PLÅYER
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
To delete entered data
Press the CLR button.
(Continued)
Chapter 6 Editing
6-5
Chapter 6 Editing
2
Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME
menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO),
[F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS
A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS CUE)).
Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME
menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO),
[F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS ACH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS CUE)).
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
4
Press the SET button to set the input data.
SET is
displayed.
PRE
REÅD
off
off
INS
TC
off
$
AUDIO
OUT point OUT point
$
$
LOCK
TCR
ÅSSEMBLE
IN point
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL H O M E
GREEN SET
01 00 30 00
off
CONFI
AUDIO
IN point
Recorder VTR $
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
PLÅYER
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
Player VTR
4
AUDIO
IN point
4
IN point
4
4
OUT point
AUDIO
OUT point
Automatic split edit point setting
5
Press the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT)
button.
The time data for the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or
AUDIO OUT) point appears in the menu display.
Note
Chapter 6 Editing
During split editing, if you set six or more points for
the recorder and player VTRs, the time data for the
edit points flash, indicating that editing is impossible.
Delete all unnecessary edit points by pressing the IN,
OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT button while
holding down the CLR button.
For details, refer to “Deleting edit points” on page 6-9.
About automatic split edit point setting
Split editing requires a total of eight edit points: four
edit points for video editing (IN and OUT points for
both the recorder and player VTRs) and four edit
points for audio editing (AUDIO IN and OUT points
for both the recorder and player VTRs). However, as
soon as you set five edit points, the VTR automatically
sets the remaining three points. For example, if you
set three edit points for video (or audio) and two for
audio (or video), the remaining three points are
automatically set, regardless of whether these points
are for the recorder or player.
In the following example, the points enclosed in a box
have been set manually and the AUDIO OUT point for
the recorder VTR, and the AUDIO IN and OUT points
for the player VTR have been set automatically.
Note that whether set manually or automatically, all
edit points can be changed or deleted at any time.
6-6
Chapter 6
Editing
You can select audio cut-in, crossfade, and fade in/out
in edits, as well as their duration, by VTR SETUP
menu.
For details, refer to the menu items in the 300 range in the
VTR SETUP menu.
When the AUDIO IN point is not set for insert
editing of audio only
As long as the AUDIO OUT point is set, the VTR is
ready for preview or editing. If the AUDIO IN point
has not been set, the current tape address is
automatically set as the AUDIO IN point.
Using a VTR without the split editing function
If the player VTR does not support the separate setting
of edit points for video and audio, you can set AUDIO
IN and AUDIO OUT points on the recorder and three
video edit points to enable split editing.
6-1-5 Confirming Edit Points
You can confirm the duration between two edit points
in the display.
Displaying the duration between two edit
points
The following six kinds of duration can be displayed in
the time data display window:
• Between IN and OUT points
• Between IN and AUDIO OUT points
• Between IN and AUDIO IN points
• Between OUT and AUDIO OUT points
• Between OUT and AUDIO IN points
• Between AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points
To display the duration, follow the procedure below.
1
2
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which you want to confirm a
duration.
The button lights up.
Hold down any two IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or
AUDIO OUT buttons.
The duration between the points corresponding to
the two buttons is displayed. The value can be
negative.
You can preroll the tape to a point prior to the edit start
point (preroll point), or cue up the tape to any edit
point.
When prerolling the tape during split editing, the VTR
regards the earliest IN or AUDIO IN point as the edit
start point.
Follow the procedure below to cue up or preroll the
tape.
1
2
Cuing up and prerolling
1
2
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR which you want to operate.
The button lights up.
• To cue up the tape to an edit point
Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button while holding down the PREROLL
button.
The tape moves to the edit point corresponding
to the button, then stops.
• To preroll the tape
Press the PREROLL button.
The tape is rewound to a point five seconds prior
to the edit start point.
Note
TIMER
SEL
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL T C
GREEN
TC
LOCK
TIMER
RESET
TIMER
SET
DUR VITC PLÅY
4FD F1
00Ó 00µ 30ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 01:00:30:00
OUT 01:00:00:00
Duration
between two
edit points
TIMER
HOLD
off
TC
SEL
TCG
SOURCE
TCG
MODE
RUN
MODE
DF/NDF
VITC
VITC
int
prst
rec
df
on
When the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu is
set to CTL, cuing up is slightly slower than in TC
mode. This is to maintain the accuracy of the CTL
signals.
You can set up the VTR so that priority is placed on
cuing accuracy or speed. Change the VTR setting
through 404. CUEUP BY TC and 405. CUEUP BY
CTL in the VTR SETUP menu.
Displaying the duration between two edit points
Chapter 6 Editing
6-7
Chapter 6 Editing
The displayed duration differs for each of the
following cases:
• When two edit points are set: duration between the
two points
• When only one of the edit points is set: duration
between the set edit point and the current tape address
• When no edit points are set: duration of the previous
edit section
6-1-6 Cuing Up and Prerolling
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Changing the preroll time
The preroll time is factory set to 5 seconds, but can be
set to any time between 0 and 30 seconds, in 1-second
steps.
For details, refer to “4-2-8 Setting the Preroll Time (PROLL TIME)” on page 4-16.
When changing the preroll time, set it so that the
recorded section prior to the edit start point is longer
than the preroll time.
The preroll time used in automatic editing is the preroll
time set for the recorder.
6-1-7 Previewing
When all necessary edit points have been set, the
PREVIEW button flashes to indicate that the VTR is
ready for preview.
PREVIEW button
PREROLL button
STOP button
Previewing
Press the PREVIEW button to preview the results of
the edit.
During previewing, the PREVIEW button lights up.
After previewing, correct the edit points as required,
then do the preview again.
Chapter 6 Editing
For details on modifying edit points, refer to “6-1-8
Modifying Edit Points” on page 6-9.
To stop previewing
Press the STOP button.
The tape stops immediately.
To rewind the tape to the preroll point
Press the PREROLL button.
To rewind the tape to the edit point
Press the PREROLL button together with the button
corresponding to the edit point.
6-8
Chapter 6
Editing
Monitoring signals during previewing
During previewing, you can monitor the following
video and audio signals on a monitor connected to the
recorder VTR:
• Between preroll and IN points: Playback signal of
the recorder VTR can be monitored.
• Between IN and OUT points: Playback signal of the
player VTR can be monitored in E-E mode.
• Between OUT and post-roll points: Playback signal
of the recorder VTR can be monitored.
This may be illustrated as shown below:
IN point
$
PB
(recorder VTR)
OUT point
$
EE
(player VTR)
6-1-8 Modifying Edit Points
If an edit point is incorrectly set, for example, if an
OUT point is located before an IN point, or the length
of an edit section is different for the recorder and
player VTRs, the time data for the incorrectly set edit
point flash indicating that the VTR cannot perform
editing or previewing. In this case, delete the edit
point, then set a new one correctly.
You can also move an edit point position in one-frame
units.
Deleting edit points
1
PB
(recorder VTR)
Deleting edit points
1
2
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR on which to perform the edit point
deletion.
The button lights up.
Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT
button while holding down the CLR button to
delete the corresponding edit point.
The edit point is deleted and --:--:--:-- appears in
the menu display.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-9
Chapter 6 Editing
2
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Moving an edit point position one frame at
a time
2
Press the + or – button, then use the numeric
buttons to enter the value to be added or
subtracted.
To cancel the entered value
Press the CLR button.
1
PRE
REÅD
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL H O M E
GREEN
+ 30 00
off
LOCK
TCR
CONFI
off
ÅSSEMBLE
off
2,3
INS
TC
off
Moving an edit point position one frame at a time
1
2
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR on which to modify the edit point.
The button lights up.
3
Chapter 6 Editing
Press the + or – button while holding down the IN,
OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button.
Pressing the + or – button moves the edit point one
frame forward or backward, respectively.
Moving an edit point position with the numeric buttons
1
Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button while holding down the RCL button.
Time data for the edit point appears in the data
entry window.
6-10
Chapter 6
Editing
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 01:30:00:00 ÅOUT 01:35:00:00
IN 01:30:00:00
OUT 01:35:00:00
PLÅYER
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
Press the SET button.
The result of the addition or subtraction is entered.
PRE
REÅD
D O L B Y N R C H . C O N D DIGITÅL H O M E
GREEN SET
01 00 30 00
off
LOCK
TCR
off
ÅSSEMBLE
off
INS
TC
off
Moving an edit point position with the numeric
buttons
42 3
Entered value
is displayed.
SET is
displayed.
After making the modification, release the
respective edit point button that you have been
holding down (IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO
OUT button).
1
4FD F1
INS
VIDEO
CONFI
3
PLÅY
4
PLÅY
4FD F1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 01:30:00:00 ÅOUT 01:35:00:00
IN 01:30:00:00
OUT 01:35:00:00
PLÅYER
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
IN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button.
The modified time data for the edit point appears
in the display.
6-1-9 Performing Automatic Editing
Overview
Once you have set the necessary edit points, the
AUTO EDIT button flashes to show that the VTR is
ready for automatic editing.
Preroll point
.
During automatic editing, the tape in the recorder VTR
and the player VTR move as shown in the diagram
below.
IN point
OUT point
Post-roll point
$
$
.
Recorder VTR
Prerolla)
Post-rollb)
Overrecording
Assemble editing
Insert editing
Playback mode
Chapter 6 Editing
Stop
Player VTR
Playback mode
Stop
Tape movement during automatic editing
a) Preroll time: Factory-set to 5 seconds. Can be set from 0
to 30 seconds, in 1-second steps, through the SET UP
menu.
b) Post-roll time: 2 seconds.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-11
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Monitoring signals during editing
During editing, you can monitor the following video
and audio signals on a monitor connected to the
recorder VTR.
• Between preroll and IN points: Playback signal of
the recorder VTR can be monitored.
• Between IN and OUT points: Playback signal of the
player VTR can be monitored in E-E mode.
• Between OUT and post-roll points: Playback signal
of the recorder VTR can be monitored.
The video and audio signals that can be monitored are
shown in the diagram below.
Monitoring video and audio signals of the
recorder and player VTRs on a single
monitor
The following procedure allows you to perform editing
effectively even when using only one monitor.
1
2
3
IN point
$
PB
(recorder VTR)
OUT point
$
EE
(player VTR)
PB
(recorder VTR)
Monitoring signals during editing
Chapter 6 Editing
In CONFI mode, you can monitor video and audio
signals that are just being edited.
Through a menu setting, you can also monitor signals
between preroll and postroll points, including portions
between IN and OUT points, through the CONFI
(confidence) heads during editing. Set the [F2]
(CONFI) button in HOME menu to on.
Use 316. CONFIDENCE PB MODE in the VTR
SETUP menu to select the CONFI playback mode.
6-12
Chapter 6
Editing
Connect the recorder VTR to the monitor.
Set 008. MONITOR SEL in the VTR SETUP
menu to AUTO.
Press the PLAYER button on the recorder VTR to
place the recorder into E-E mode.
Playback signals from the player VTR are output
to the monitor.
Note
Insert editing requires that CTL signals are recorded
onto the tape in the recorder VTR. Any sections of the
tape onto which CTL signals have not been recorded
cannot be used for insert editing.
Performing automatic editing
Press the AUTO EDIT button to perform automatic
editing.
The AUTO EDIT button lights up during automatic
editing, then turns off when it ends.
PREVIEW button
AUTO EDIT button
Modifying edit points for automatic editing
later
After you perform automatic editing, the time data of
IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points remain
stored in memory. The stored data can be later used to
modify edit points or to execute automatic editing
again.
Follow the procedure below to modify edit points after
executing automatic editing.
3
OUT button
ENTRY button
Performing automatic editing
To confirm the results of the editing
Press the REVIEW button to confirm the edit results.
When the preview ends, the tape rewinds to the OUT
point, then stops.
Modifying edit points for automatic editing later
1
2
In HOME menu, press the ALT button, and then
the [F10] (LAST EDIT) button.
The edit points used in the last automatic edit are
restored.
Modify the edit points.
For details on modifying edit points, refer to “6-1-8
Modifying Edit Points” on page 6-9.
3
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
The VTR performs automatic editing.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-13
Chapter 6 Editing
To stop automatic editing
Press the OUT button while holding down the ENTRY
button.
The point where the buttons are pressed is treated as an
OUT point and editing stops.
1
6-2
Advanced
Automatic
Editing
6-2
Advanced
Automatic
This section describes the following advanced editing
methods:
• DMC editing
• Quick editing
• Consecutive editing
• Preread editing
Editing
Setting edit points and playback speed
Use the procedure below to set edit points and
playback speeds for DMC editing.
1
9 5 3
6-2-1 Performing DMC Editing
If your player VTR has DT (Dynamic Tracking)
capability, you can perform variable speed editing by
controlling the playback speed from the lower control
panel. This type of editing is called DMC editing.
2 7,8 4 11
Overview of DMC editing
Setting edit points and playback speed
Requirements for DMC editing
• DMC editing may be done during assemble or insert
editing, but not during split editing.
• The player VTR must support DT playback.
Chapter 6 Editing
Tape movement during DMC editing
During DMC editing, the tape moves as shown in the
diagram below.
Preroll
IN point
$
1
2
OUT point
$ Post-roll
Recorder
VTR
3
4
Stop
Playback
mode
DMC editing mode
Preroll time × IN point
initial speed
$
Post-roll time ×
final speed
Moves at
the final
speed.
Tape movement during DMC editing
6-14
Chapter 6
Editing
Press the ALT button, then the [F7] (DMC) button
so that the button lights up.
The VTR enters DMC editing mode.
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR to be operated.
The button lights up.
Press the IN or OUT button while holding down
the ENTRY button to set an edit point.
You cannot set an OUT point for the player VTR
for DMC editing.
5
6
Playback at speeds
stored in memory
Press the [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the HOME
menu, or press the respective INSERT button ([F4]
(INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1),
[F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS A-CH3), [F8] (INS
A-CH4) or [F10] (INS CUE) button) to select the
edit mode that you want.
Note
Playback
mode
Player
VTR
Moves at
the initial
speed.
6,7,10
Stop
Press the PLAYER button.
The button lights up.
Press the search dial to enter shuttle mode.
The SHUTTLE button lights up.
7
8
9
Set the initial playback speed by rotating the search
dial while holding down the [F7] (DMC) button in
the HOME menu.
The display shows the set speed.
If you wish to set the initial speed to normal speed,
press the PLAY button.
Release the [F7] (DMC) button in HOME menu
after setting the initial speed.
Press the PREVIEW button.
The tapes in both VTRs are prerolled, then the tape
in the recorder VTR runs at normal speed, and the
tape in the player VTR runs at the initial speed.
Performing DMC editing
After storing the playback speed(s) in memory in
preview mode, press the AUTO EDIT button to
perform DMC editing.
DMC editing is performed at the playback speed(s)
stored in memory.
PREVIEW button
10 When the p indicator appears indicating that the
IN point has been passed, rotate the search dial to
the desired playback speed(s).
The varying playback speeds are stored in memory
while the p indicator appears in the display.
When the tape passes the OUT point, the p
indicator goes off to indicate that memorization of
the varying playback speeds has been completed.
If the p indicator goes off before the tape
passes the OUT point
The VTR has reached its storage capacity of 120
seconds and cannot store any more playback speed
variations.
To exit DMC editing mode
Press the ALT/[F7] (DMC) button in HOME menu
while holding down the CLR button.
To confirm the results of DMC editing
Press the PREVIEW button.
Notes on controlling VTRs with DT heads
Shuttle mode: Noiseless playback within a range
of –1 to +3 times normal speed in 12 steps is
possible. In this mode, when the playback speed
exceeds the noiseless playback range, block noise
appears in the video output. Note also that the
noiseless playback range may vary, depending on
specifications of the VTR being used.
Variable mode: Noiseless playback within a range
of –1 to +3 times normal speed in 54 steps is
possible. You cannot, however, vary speed
beyond the noiseless playback range. Note also
that the noiseless playback range may vary,
depending on specifications of the VTR being
used.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-15
Chapter 6 Editing
11 Press the STOP button.
Performing DMC editing
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing
6-2-2 Performing Quick Editing
After selecting the edit mode, quick editing can save
you time by allowing you to set edit points and
preview the results at the same time.
Do quick editing as follows:
2,4 1
3
5
Performing quick editing
1
Chapter 6 Editing
2
3
4
5
Press the PLAYER or RECORDER button to
select the VTR to be operated, locate the position
for the IN point on the tape in the respective player
and recorder VTR, then stop the tape at that
position.
Press the PREVIEW button to perform previewing.
The points selected in Step 1 are set as IN points
and the IN point is displayed on both VTRs.
When the tape reaches the position that you want
for an OUT point, press the OUT button while
holding down the ENTRY button.
The OUT point is set, and both player and recorder
VTRs stop two seconds later.
Perform previewing again to check the position of
the edit points and, if necessary, modify the edit
points.
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
Quick editing starts.
When quick editing ends, the recorder VTR stops
at its respective OUT point, and the player VTR
stops two seconds after its respective OUT point.
6-16
Chapter 6
Editing
For even quicker editing
1
2
3
Press the PLAYER or RECORDER button to
select the VTR to be operated, locate the position
for the IN point on the tape in the respective player
and recorder VTR, then stop the tape at that
position.
Press the AUTO EDIT button to start editing.
While viewing the monitor, press the OUT button
while holding down the ENTRY button at the point
where you want to stop editing.
The point at which editing started becomes the IN
point, and point where editing stopped becomes the
OUT point.
6-2-3 Performing Consecutive
Editing
To stop consecutive editing
Press the OUT button while holding down the ENTRY
button.
After performing automatic editing, the tape in the
recorder VTR is automatically rewound to the OUT
point. From then, you can set IN and OUT points only
for the player VTR to do consecutive edit operations.
This is called consecutive editing. The OUT point for
the recorder VTR will be the IN point for the next edit.
Previous OUT point=Next IN point
.
Recorder
VTR
Previous edit
section
Next edit section
Player
VTR
4
IN point
4
OUT point
Consecutive editing
Chapter 6 Editing
Follow the procedure below to perform consecutive
editing.
2
1
3
Performing consecutive editing
1
2
3
Set IN and OUT points for the player VTR.
The recorder VTR automatically sets the last OUT
point as the new IN point.
Press the PREVIEW button to preview.
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
Automatic editing starts.
When editing ends, the recorder VTR stops at the
OUT point and the player VTR stops two seconds
after the OUT point.
Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to perform consecutive editing.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-17
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing
6-2-4 Performing Preread Editing
Video and digital audio signals already recorded on the
tape can be used as an edit source for insert editing.
This type of editing is called preread editing, as the
VTR uses preread heads to read signals in advance.
Signals that are read in advance can be sent to mixers
for mixing, then recorded to the original channels or
other digital audio channels.
The preread editing settings are performed with the
[F1] (PRE READ) button in the HOME menu.
For details on the settings, refer to “4-2-1 Setting the
Preread Function (PRE READ)” on page 4-14.
Video
source
Digital or analog video input
Digital or
analog
video
output
2
Chapter 6 Editing
3
4
Digital or
analog
audio
input
Digital or
analog
audio
output
Preread editing
Chapter 6
5
6
7
Audio
source
6-18
• In preread editing, if an input video signal is used as
the reference signal for the output video signal,
oscillation may occur because of loop-closing. To
avoid this, select the external reference signal for
preread editing by setting the item 309. SERVO
REFERENCE SELECT in the VTR SETUP menu to
ext.
• When preread mode is selected, shifting of the VTR
to E-E mode is disabled in all operation modes to
prevent oscillation caused by loop-closing. If preread
mode is deselected while a loop between the input
and output of the same channel exists, E-E signals are
output and oscillation occurs. To prevent oscillation,
do the procedure below to select PB mode for both
the video and digital audio channels before the start
of preread editing.
1
Video
switcher
Audio
mixer
Notes
Editing
Press the ALT button, then press the [F2] (PB/EE)
button in HOME menu to select PB.
Press the ALT button again, and press the [F1]
(PRE READ) button repeatedly while holding
down the SFT button to select video, audio or a/v.
Make the required connections for preread editing.
Perform preread editing after selecting the insert
editing mode.
After preread editing, undo all the connections
used for the preread editing.
Press the [F1] (PRE READ) button while holding
down the SFT button to select off.
Check that no loop connections remain.
6-3 Manual Editing
Follow the procedure below to perform manual
editing.
4 1
6 3,5
2
Manual editing
1
3
4
5
6
Press the [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the HOME
menu or press the respective INSERT button ([F4]
(INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1),
[F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS
A-CH4) or [F10] (INS CUE) button) to select the
edit mode that you want.
Chapter 6 Editing
2
After pressing the RECORDER button, enter jog
or shuttle mode to position the tape at a place a few
seconds before the position at which you want to
set an edit point.
Press the PLAY button.
Playback starts.
Press the PLAY button while holding down the
EDIT button at the point where you want to start
editing (IN point).
Editing starts.
Press the PLAY button where you want to end
editing (OUT point).
Editing ends, but the tape continues to run in
playback mode.
Press the STOP button to stop the tape.
Notes
• Noise will appear on the picture at the IN or OUT
point if you start editing while the VTR is stopped, or
if you stop editing by pressing the STOP button.
• To ensure a stable picture, start playback at least two
seconds before the IN point.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-19
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing
Chapter 6 Editing
6-20
Chapter 6
Editing
7-1 Head Cleaning
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Use the BCT-5CLN Cleaning Cassette to clean the
heads.
Read the instructions included with the cleaning
cassette carefully, as improper usage can damage the
heads.
Follow the procedure below to clean the heads.
1
2
Insert the cleaning cassette.
Press the EJECT button simultaneously with the
PLAY button.
Head cleaning starts.
After head cleaning continues for five seconds, the
cleaning cassette is automatically ejected.
Notes
• When not using the automatic eject method above
with the DVW-A500/1 series, be sure to eject the
cleaning cassette after cleaning not to damage the
heads.
• When cleaning the heads of the DVW-500/1 series,
perform Step 2 immediately after inserting the
cleaning cassette.
If you do not, the cassette will be ejected after two or
three seconds and no head cleaning will be done.
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Chapter 7
Maintenance
7-1
3-1
Connecting
External
Equipment
7-2
Moisture
Condensation
If you suddenly move the VTR from a cold location to
a warm one, or use the VTR in a very humid place,
moisture in the air can form on the head-drum or tape
guide. This is called moisture condensation. If you
play a tape under these conditions, the tape may adhere
to the drum where moisture has collected and become
damaged.
If “ERROR-10” appears immediately after
turning the VTR on
Leave the VTR turned on and wait until the error
message goes off. Inserting a cassette is not possible
while the message is on.
When the error message disappears, you can use the
VTR.
If moisture condenses on the head-drum while you are
operating the VTR, the error message “ERROR-10”
appears in the time data display section.
If you move the VTR from a cold to a warm
location
Leave the VTR turned off for about ten minutes since
some time is needed for the condensation-detection
mechanism to work.
PRE
REÅD
D O L B Y N R CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME
KEY-INH GREEN BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
off
TCR
CONFI
off
LOCK
P LEÅRYR O R - 140F D F 1
01Ó 04µ 58ß 00ƒ
HUMID
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
ÅSSEMIN 00:00:00:00
OUT 00:00:00:00
BLE
off
INS
TC
off
INS
VIDEO
INS
Å-CH1
INS
Å-CH2
INS
Å-CH3
INS
Å-CH4
INS
CUE
off
off
off
off
off
off
When moisture condensation has occurred
Chapter 7 Maintenance
When this error message appears, the drum and
capstan motors stop and the cassette is automatically
ejected. The drum then starts to rotate again to dry the
surface of drum.
Once the moisture has evaporated, the error message
disappears.
7-2
Chapter 7
Maintenance
Specifications
0.5 seconds or less (from standby
on)
Load/unload time 6 seconds or less
Recommended tapes
Digital Betacam cassette (S, L)
BCT-D6/D12/D22/D32/D40/
D34L/D64L/D94L/D124L or
equivalent
Betacam/Betacam SP cassette (S,
L)
for playback with DVW-A500/1
and A500P/1
Digital video
Sampling frequency
Y: 13.5 MHz
R-Y/B-Y: 6.75 MHz
Quantization
10 bits/sample
Compression
Coefficient recording system
Channel coding
S-NRZI PR-IV
Error correction Reed-Solomon code
Error concealment Adaptive three dimensional
Digital serial input to analog component out
Bandwidth
Y: 0 to 5.75 MHz ±0.5 dB
R-Y/B-Y: 0 to 2.75 MHz ±0.5 dB
S/N ratio
62 dB or more
K factor (2T Pulse)
1% or less
Analog component input to analog
component output
Input A/D quantization
8 bits/sample
Bandwidth
Y: 0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–0.7 dB
R-Y/B-Y: 0 to 2.75 MHz +0.5 dB/
–0.7 dB
S/N ratio
56 dB or more
K factor (2T Pulse)
1% or less
LF non-linearity 2.5% or less
Appendix
A-1
Appendix
Power requirements
100 to 240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
DVW-A500/1 and A500P/1: 300
VA (240 W)
DVW-500/1 and 500P/1: 270 VA
(220 W)
Operating temperature
+5°C to +40°C (+41°F to + 104°F)
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to + 140°F)
Humidity
25% to 80% (relative humidity)
Mass
DVW-A500/1 and A500P/1: 35 kg
(77 lb)
DVW-500/1 and 500P/1: 33 kg
(73 lb)
Dimensions
427 × 237 × 520 mm (w/h/d)
(16 3/4 × 9 3/8 × 20 1/2 inches)
Recording format Digital Betacam
Tape speed
Digital Betacam: 96.7 mm/s
Betacam playback:
118.6 mm/s (DVW-A500/1)
101.5 mm/s (DVW-A500P/1)
Digital record/playback time
124 minutes with BCT-D124L
Analog Betacam playback time
DVW-A500/1: 90 minutes
with BCT-90MLA cassette
DVW-A500P/1: 100 minutes
with BCT-90MLA cassette
Fast forward/rewind time
Approx. 3 minutes with BCTD124L
Search speed
Shuttle mode:
Digital Betacam: Still to approx.
±50 times normal playback speed
Betacam playback:
Still to ±35 (for DVW-A500/1)
Still to ±42 (for DVW-A500P/1)
Variable mode:
–1 to +3 times normal playback
speed
Jog mode:
0 to ±1 or ±3 times normal
playback speed (selectable in
VTR SETUP menu)
Dynamic Tracking range
–1 to +3 times normal playback
speed
Servo lock time
Appendix
General
Specifications
Analog composite input (with optional BKDW505/506) to analog composite output
Bandwidth
Y: 0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–0.7 dB
S/N ratio
58 dB or more1)
Differential gain 2% or less
Differential phase 2° or less
Y/C delay
15 ns or less
K factor (2T Pulse)
1% or less
Output SCH phase
Based upon RS-170A/CCIR
R.624-3
Digital audio (CH-1 to CH-4)
Sampling frequency
48 kHz (synchronized with video)
Quantization
20 bits/sample
Wow and flutter Below measurable level
Headroom
20 dB (or 18 dB selectable)
Emphasis
T1=50 µs, T2=15 µs (on/off
selectable in recording mode)
Appendix
Analog input to output
A/D, D/A quantization
18 bits/sample
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB
(0 dB at 1 kHz)
Dynamic range
More than 95 dB (at 1 kHz,
emphasis on)
Distortion
Less than 0.05% (at 1 kHz,
emphasis on, reference level2))
Crosstalk
Less than –80 dB (at 1 kHz,
between any two channels)
Analog audio (Cue track)
Frequency response
100 Hz to 12 kHz ±3 dB
S/N ratio
More than 45 dB (at 3% distortion
level)
Distortion
Less than 2% (T.H.D at 1 kHz
reference level2))
Wow and flutter DVW-A500/1 and 500/1: Less
than 0.2% rms
DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1: Less
than 0.2% (DIN 45507 weighted)
Betacam SP playback (for DVW-A500/1
and A500P/1 only)
Video
DVW-A500/1
Metal Tape
Oxide Tape
30 Hz to 4.5 MHz
+0.5 dB/–3.0 dB
30 Hz to 4.1 MHz
+0.5 dB/–6.0 dB
Bandwidth R-Y/B-Y 30 Hz to 1.5 MHz
+0.5 dB/–3.0 dB
30 Hz to 1.5 MHz
+0.5 dB/–3.0 dB
S/N Ratio Y
51 dB or more
48 dB or more
S/N Ratio R-Y/B-Y
48 dB or more
45 dB or more
K factor (2T pulse)
2% or less
3% or less
Bandwidth Y
LF non-linearity Y
3% or less
LF non-linearity
R-Y/B-Y
4% or less
Y/C delay
20 ns or less
DVW-A500P/1
Metal Tape
Oxide Tape
25 Hz to 5.5 MHz
+0.5 dB/–3.0 dB
25 Hz to 4.0 MHz
+0.5 dB/–6.0 dB
Bandwidth R-Y/B-Y 25 Hz to 2.0 MHz
+0.5 dB/–3.0 dB
25 Hz to 1.5 MHz
+0.5 dB/–3.0 dB
S/N Ratio Y
48 dB or more
46 dB or more
S/N Ratio R-Y/B-Y
48 dB or more
45 dB or more
K factor (2T pulse)
1.5% or less
3% or less
Bandwidth Y
LF non-linearity Y
3% or less
LF non-linearity
R-Y/B-Y
4% or less
Y/C delay
20 ns or less
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) measured in video setup 0% mode for the BKDW-505 as
well.
A-2
Appendix
2) Reference level: + 4 dBm
Audio
DVW-A500/1
LNG
Processor adjustment range
Metal Tape
Oxide Tape
Frequency
50 Hz to 15 kHz
response (at 10 dB +1.0 dB/–2.0 dB
below refernce
levela))
50 Hz to 15 kHz
±3.0 dB
More than 72 dB
More than 50 dB
(Dolby NR off)
S/N Ratio (at 3%
distortional level)
Distortion (T.H.D at Less than 1%
1 kHz reference
levela))
Wow and flutter
Less than 2%
Input connectors
Frequency
response (at
reference levela))
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–2.0 dB
S/N Ratio (at 3%
distortional level)
More than 85 dB
Distortion (T.H.D at
1 kHz reference
levela))
Less than 0.5%
a) Reference level: + 4 dBm
DVW-A500P
LNG
Metal Tape
Oxide Tape
Frequency
response (at 20dB
below peak levela))
50 Hz to 15 kHz
+1.0 dB/–2.0 dB
50 Hz to 15 kHz
±3.0 dB
S/N Ratio (CCIR
468-3 weighted, at
3% distortional
level)
More than 68 dB
More than 62 dB
Less than 2%
Less than 0.1%
AFM
Frequency
response (at
reference levela))
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–2.0 dB
S/N Ratio (at 3%
distortional level)
More than 72 dB (CCIR 468-3
weighted)
Less than 0.5%
a) Reference level: +4 dBm
b) Peak level: +8 dB above reference level
Unless otherwise specified, all values in the above table
were obtained by measuring analog output signals with
Dolby noise reduction circuitry on.
SERIAL V/A INPUT
BNC (1 with active through out)
Serial digital (270 Mbits/s)
SMPTE 259M/CCIR 656-III
ANALOG I/O VIDEO INPUT
REF.VIDEO: BNC (2 in loop through
connection)
Black burst or composite sync
0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ω, Sync negative
COMPONENT:BNC (3 for 1 set)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, Sync negative
R-Y/B-Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω, with
100% color bar for DVWA500P/1 and 500P/1 and with
100% or 75% color bar
selectable for
DVW-A500/1 and 500/1
COMPOSITE:
BNC (2 in loop through
connection) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, Sync
negative (with optional BKDW505/506)
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) CH-1/2, CH-3/4
XLR, 3-pin, female (2)
AES/EBU format, balanced
AUDIO INPUT CH-1/2/3/4/CUE
XLR, 3-pin, female (5)
LOW OFF: –60 dBu, high
impedance, balanced
HIGH OFF: +4 dBu, high
impedance, balanced
HIGH ON: +4 dBm,600 Ω
termination, balanced
TIME CODE IN XLR, 3-pin, female (1)
0.5 to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ, balanced
Appendix
A-3
Appendix
Distortion (T.H.D at Less than 1%
1 kHz reference
levela))
Distortion (T.H.D at
1kHz reference
levela))
Chroma phase
System phase
±3 dB/–∞ to +3 dB selectable
±3 dB/–∞ to +3 dB selectable
±30 IRE/±210 mV
±100 ns (in Betacam playback on
DVW-A500/1 and A500P/1)
±30°
Sync: ±15 µs
SC: ±200 ns
Less than 0.1% rms
AFM
Wow and flutter
(DIN 45507
weighted)
Video level
Chroma level
Setup/Black level
Y/C delay
Specifications
Output connectors
Accessories supplied
SERIAL V/A OUTPUT
BNC (4 including 1 for character
superimpose)
Serial digital (270 Mbits/s)
SMPTE 259M/CCIR 656-III
ANALOG I/O VIDEO OUTPUT
COMPONENT:BNC (3 for 1 set)
Y: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, Sync negative
R-Y/B-Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω, with
100% color bar for DVWA500P/1 and 500P/1 and with
100% or 75% color bar
selectable for DVW-A500/1 and
500/1
COMPOSITE: BNC (3 including 1 for character
superimpose)
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, Sync negative
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU) CH-1/2, CH-3/4
XLR, 3-pin, male (2)
AES/EBU format, balanced
AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/2/3/4/CUE
XLR, 3-pin, male (5)
+4 dBm at 600 Ω load, low
impedance, balanced
TIME CODE OUT
XLR, 3-pin, male (1)
2.2 Vp-p at 600 Ω load, low
impedance, balanced
PHONES
JM-60 stereo phone jack
–∞ to –12 dBu at 8 Ω load,
unbalanced
AC power cord (1)
PSW 4 × 16 screws for rack mounting (4)
Operation Manual (1)
Installation Manual (1)
Installation and Maintenance Manual (1)
Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1)
Appendix
Remote connectors
CONTROL PANEL
D-sub 15-pin, female
REMOTE 1-IN
D-sub 9-pin, female
REMOTE 1-OUT D-sub 9-pin, female
RS-232C
D-sub 25-pin, female
VIDEO CONTROL
D-sub 15-pin, male (for optional
BVR-50/50P)
REMOTE PARALLEL I/O (50P)
D-sub 50-pin, female (with
optional BKDW-509)
A-4
Appendix
Optional accessories
BKDW-505/506
Analog Composite Decoder Board
(NTSC/PAL)
BKDW-507
Audio Program Play Board
BKDW-509
Parallel (50P) Interface Kit
BKDW-514
Control Panel
BVR-50/50P
TBC Remote Controller
RMM-110
Rack Mount Adaptor
ECD-3C/10C/30C AES/EBU Digital Audio Cable
RCC-5G
9-pin Remote Control Cable
BCT-5CLN
Cleaning Cassette Tape
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Glossary
AES/EBU format
A standard format for the transfer of
digital audio signals. In this format, two
audio signals can be input/output through
one XLR-type connector.
Assemble editing
An edit mode for adding new scenes to the
end of previously recorded scenes. In this
mode, all video, audio, and control signals
are newly recorded. Though the result is
the coexistence of two different CTL
signals on the tape, continuity of CTL
signals at the edit points is maintained
electrically.
Backspace editing
Also called phase matching. During
backspace editing, the VTR automatically
rewinds the tape a few seconds after
recording of a scene has been completed.
This allows the tape to attain a stable
speed before the start of recording of the
next scene, thus maintaining signal
continuity during editing.
Bridging connection
A connection that allows a signal input to
an input terminal to pass throuth the unit
and exit from an output terminal for input
to a third piece of equipment.
Capstan
A drive mechanism that moves the tape at
a specified speed. Its rotation is normally
synchronized with a reference sync signal.
Color frame locking
A procedure in which the time code frame
value is set to an odd number for the first
and second color fields, and to an even
number for the third and fourth color
fields.
Color framing
A method used by the VTR to maintain
continuity of the color subcarrier phase
between each two-frame cycle (NTSC) or
four-frame cycle (PAL) to avoid picture
fluctuation at edit points.
Composite video signal
A signal that consists of video (luminance
and color sub carrier), sync (horizontal and
vertical), and color burst signals.
Condensation
Moisture that collects on the head drum of
the tape transport mechanism, causing
damage to the tape and malfunction of the
VTR.
CONFI (confidence) heads
Confidence heads are additional heads that
play back signals currently being recorded.
A VTR with the CONFI heads allows you
to verify that the audio and video signals
are being recorded correctly.
CTL
Abbreviation for control signal. A pulse
signal that can be counted, to determine
the number of frames, and therefore the
tape’s running time. Used mainly for
adjusting the tracking position of video
heads, and to achieve time code continuity
during continuous recording. This signal is
recorded on a longitudinal tape track.
Cue point
A point used to mark the beginning of a
section of tape so that it can be located for
later playback or editing.
Drop frame mode
In the NTSC system, the actual number of
frames per second is approximately 29.97,
while the time code value advances one
second every 30 frames. In drop frame
mode, the time code is advaced in such a
way that this difference in the value
between real time and the time codes is
corrected. Specifically, two frames are
skipped at the beginning of each minute,
except for every tenth minute, so that the
frame value for time codes matches that
for real time.
See also Non-drop frame mode.
E-E mode
Abbreviation for Electric-to-Electric
mode. Input signals are passed through the
recorder’s electronics and output through
the output connectors. This mode is used
for confirming input signals or adjusting
the input level.
Emphasis
Emphasizing the high frequencies of a
signal before processing (pre-emphasis)
and de-emphasizing those high frequencies
before output (de-emphasis). This reduces
deterioration of the signal-to-noise ratio in
the high frequency range.
Insert editing
An edit mode for inserting new scenes into
the middle of previously recorded scenes.
In this mode, only video and audio signals
can be recorded separately. The VTR uses
the prerecorded CTL signals on the tape to
control tape travel. Therefore, before
editing can be done in this mode, CTL
signals must be recorded over the entire
length of the tape.
Longitudinal time code
See LTC.
LTC
Abbreviation for Longitudinal Time Code.
This is the time code recorded onto a
longitudinal track of the tape. During the
playback of still pictures, LTC cannnot be
read since the tape is not moving. During
slow playback, the LTC output is so small
that it may not be read correctly,
depending on the playback speed.
See also VITC.
Luminance signal
A signal that determines the brightness of
the picture. Also called the Y signal.
Non-drop frame mode
A mode of advancing the time code in
such a way that the difference in frame
values between real time and the time code
is neglected. Using this mode produces a
difference of approximately 86 seconds
per day between real time and the time
code, which causes problems when editing
programs in units of seconds using the
number of frames as a refernce.
See also Drop frame mode.
Preroll
The rewinding of a video tape in the player
or recorder VTR by a certain length before
an edit point, allowing the tape to attain a
stable speed at the edit point and
synchronization with the other video tape
during editing.
Appendix
A-5
Appendix
Color frame
A color subcarrier phase having one cycle
that consists of two frames (four fields) in
the NTSC format and four frames (eight
fields) in the PAL format.
Component video signal
A video signal that consists of a luminance
signal (Y) and two chrominance (colordifference) signals (R-Y, B-Y).
Glossary
Reference video signal
A video signal containing a sync signal or
sync and burst signal, used as a reference
for synchronizing video equipment.
Servolocking
The locking of the phase and speed of a
VTR’s head drum rotation and tape
transport to a reference signal during
recording and playback.
Standby-off mode
A mode in which head drum rotation is
stopped and tape tension is released, and
thus the VTR is not ready for immediate
recording and playback. This mode
alleviates the tape and video heads from
wear or damage.
Standby-on mode
A mode in which the head drum rotates
with the tape wrapped around it, and thus
the VTR is ready for immediate recording
or playback. The VTR enters standby-off
mode after remaining in standby-on mode
for a specified length of time to prevent
wear or damage to the tape and video
heads.
Appendix
Time code
A digital signal recorded on the video tape
that supplies information such as hour,
minute, second and frame number for each
frame to facilitate the setting of edit points
or searching for specific scenes on the
tape. There are two types of time codes:
SMPTE (for the NTSC color system) and
EBU (for the PAL/SECAM color system);
and two time code recording formats:
longitudinal time code (LTC) and vertical
time code (VITC).
Tracking
The synchronizing of the head drum
rotation phase and tape transport phase
during playback and recording. Tracking
is adjusted to eliminate picture instability
when playing back material recorded on
another VTR.
Unloading
Also called “unthreading.” A process by
which the VTR winds the tape back into
the cassette case and ejects the cassette
from the slot. Normally, the VTR
automatically unloads the cassette when
you press the EJECT button.
A-6
Appendix
User bits
A recordable 32-bit section in each time
code on a video tape for recording such
information as the recording year, month,
and day, and the tape or program ID
number.
Vertical interval time code
See VITC.
VITC
Abbreviation for Vertical Interval Time
Code. This is a time code recorded on a
video signal track during the vertical
blanking interval. It can be read correctly
even during slow or still picture playback.
See also LTC.
Menu List
Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into
categories according to type of setting they perform.
Descriptions on each item are given below:
• Items related to the hours meter (Hs)
• Items related to VTR operations (000s)
• Items related to operation panels (100s)
• Items related to remote interface (200s)
• Items related to editing (300s)
• Items related to prerolling (400s)
• Items related to recording protection (500s)
• Items related to the time code generator (600s)
• Items related to the video control (700s)
• Items related to the audio control (800s)
• Items related to digital process (900s)
• Items set by switches on models DVW-A500, A500P,
500, 500P (Ks)
For details on the VTR SETUP menu, refer to “4-7-1 VTR
SETUP Menu” on page 4-40.
Items Related to the Hours Meter (Hs)
Item number
Item
Function
H01
OPERATION
HOURS
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been turned on and operated.
H02
DRUM RUNNING
HOURS
Displays the total number of hours that the drum has rotated with tape threaded.
H03
TAPE RUNNING
HOURS
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback, fastforwarding, rewinding, jog, shuttle, variable speed, and edit modes. (Does not include
still mode.)
H04
THREADING
COUNTER
Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings.
H12
DRUM RUNNING
HOURS
(resettable)
Displays the total number of hours that the drum has run with tape threaded since
last reset. Use this information as a guide for head-drum replacements.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1 (for use by qualified service
personnel only).
H13
TAPE RUNNING
HOURS
(resettable)
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback, jog, shuttle and
variable speed modes since last reset. (Does not include stop and still modes.) Use
this information as a guide for replacing the fixed head and pinch rollers.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1 (for use by qualified service
personnel only).
H14
THREADING
COUNTER
(resettable)
Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings since last reset.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1 (for use by qualified service
personnel only).
Appendix
Appendix
A-7
Menu List
Items Related to VTR Operations (000s)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
001
Item
PREROLL TIME
Settable range
00 0 sec
l
l
[05] [5 sec]
l
l
30 30 sec
Function
Selects the preroll time. A preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds
can be selected. Though generally set to 3 seconds or
longer, preroll time of 5 seconds or longer would be
recommended for phase synchronization by an edit
controller.
Appendix
002
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
CHARACTER
H-POSITION
00 00
l
l
[14] [14]
l
l
24 24
Sets the horizontal screen position of the superimposed
characters output from the SERIAL V/A OUTPUT 4(SUPER)
or COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT 3(SUPER) connector. A
hexadecimal value of 00 indicates the far left of the screen,
and 24 (decimal 36) the far right. Increasing the value moves
the starting position to the right.
002
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
CHARACTER
H-POSITION
00 00
l
l
[12] [12]
l
l
22 22
Sets the horizontal screen position of the superimposed
characters output from the SERIAL V/A OUTPUT 4(SUPER)
or VIDEO OUTPUT COMPOSITE 3(SUPER) connector. A
hexadecimal value of 00 indicates the far left of the screen,
and 22 (decimal 34) the far right. Increasing the value
moves the starting position to the right.
003
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
CHARACTER
V-POSITION
00 00
l
l
[56] [56]
l
l
6A 6A
Sets the vertical screen position of the first line of
superimposed characters output from the SERIAL V/A
output 4(SUPER) or VIDEO OUTPUT COMPOSITE
3(SUPER) connector. A hexadecimal value of 00 indicates
the top of the screen, and 6A (decimal 87) the bottom.
Increasing the value lowers the position of the characters.
003
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
CHARACTER
V-POSITION
00 00
l
l
[6A] [6A]
l
l
81 81
Sets the vertical screen position of the first line of
superimposed characters output from the SERIAL V/A
OUTPUT 4(SUPER) or VIDEO OUTPUT COMPOSITE
3(SUPER) connector. A hexadecimal value of 00 indicates
the top of the screen, and 6F (decimal 111) the bottom.
Increasing the value lowers the position of the characters.
004
SYNCHRONIZE
[0] [on]
1 off
Specifies phase synchronization of the two VTRs in phase
synchronization, when the units are connected with a 9-pin
remote cable with an editing system with this unit as the edit
controller.
0: Operates in phase synchronization
1: Does not operate in phase synchronization
005
DISPLAY
INFORMATION
SELECT
[0]
1
2
3
4
5
A-8
Appendix
[time data status]
&
time data & UB
time data & CTL
time data & time
data
time data only
replay indicate
Determines the information to be displayed as
superimposed characters output from the SERIAL V/A
OUTPUT 4(SUPER) or VIDEO OUTPUT COMPOSITE
3(SUPER) connector.
0: Time counter display information and VTR status.
1: Time counter display information and user bits.
2: Time counter display information and CTL.
3: Time counter display information and time code (LTC or
VITC).
4: Time code (LTC or VITC) only.
5: “R” (replay) is displayed during DT playback mode.
Item number
Item
Settable range
006
LOCAL FUNCTION 0 all disable
ENABLE
&
[1] [stop eject]
2 all enable
007
TAPE TIMER
DISPLAY
[0] [+/–12H]
1 24H
008
MONITORING
SELECTION FOR
VTR-TO-VTR
EDIT
[0] [recorder only]
1 auto switch
009
CHARACTER
TYPE
[0]
1
2
3
[white]
black
W/out
B/out
011
CHARACTER
V-SIZE
CONDITION
[01]
02
03
04
[ 1]
×
×2
×3
×4
012
CONDITION
DISPLAY ON
VIDEO
MONITOR
[0] [disable]
1 enable
Function
Selects which buttons on the control panel are enabled,
when this unit is in the remote control mode.
0: All switches and buttons are disabled.
1: Only the STOP and EJECT buttons are enabled.
2: All switches and buttons except the RECORDER button
and PLAYER button are enabled.
Determines whether the CTL counter displays a 12-hour or
24-hour clock.
0: 12-hour clock
1: 24-hour clock
Appendix
A-9
Appendix
In two-VTR editing system when only one monitor is
connected to the recorder, selects whether the recorder
automatically changes to E-E mode and outputs the player’s
playback signal on the monitor whenever the recorder’s
PLAYER button is pressed.
0: The recorder does not change to E-E mode.
1: The recorder change to E-E mode to and outputs the
playback signal of the player.
Determines the type of superimposed characters output from
the SERIAL V/A OUTPUT 4(SUPER) or VIDEO OUTPUT
COMPOSITE 3(SUPER) connector.
0: White letters on a black background
1: Black letters on a white background
2: White outline letters
3: Black outline letters
Determines the vertical size of superimposed characters
output from the SERIAL V/A OUTPUT 4(SUPER) or VIDEO
OUTPUT COMPOSITE 3(SUPER) connector.
01: Standard size
02: Two times standard size
03: Three times standard size
04: Four times standard size
Determines whether or not to include the display of the
channel condition with the superimposed characters.
0: Does not display the condition.
1: Displays the condition.
How the channel condition display format:
The condition is displayed below the timer or status line of
the characters. (The entire area for displaying the condition
is blank when an analog tape is inserted.)
Example: V– – – – A– – – –
The four characters following “V” indicate the condition of
each video channel from Ach to Dch of the rotary head.
The four characters following “A” indicate the condition of
each audio channel from Ach to Dch of the rotary head.
Character pattern
(Space): The condition is not indicated on the front panel
(STBY OFF, etc.).
– : The condition is good (the green indicator lights up).
* : The condition is less than good (the yellow indicator
lights up).
p : The condition is bad (the red indicator lights up).
Menu List
Items Related to Operation Panels (100s)
The values enclosed in a box one factory settings.
Item number
101
Item
SELECTION
FOR SEARCH
DIAL ENABLE
Settable range
[0] [dial direct]
1 via search key
102
(DVW-A500/1)
MAXIMUM TAPE
SPEED
[0] [ 35]
×
1 ×35 (shuttle ×24)
2 ×24
MAXIMUM TAPE
102
(DVW-A500P/1) SPEED
Appendix
103
(DVW-A500/1
and A500P/1)
A-10
Appendix
×
[0] [ 42]
1 ×42 (shuttle ×24)
2 ×24
AUDIO SELECTED [0] [manual]
LINE OUT
1 auto AFM/LNG
select
2 auto LNG select
Function
Determines how the unit is set to search mode.
0: The unit enters search mode when you rotate the search
dial in all modes except recording and edit modes.
1: The unit enters search mode when you press the
SHUTTLE, JOG or VAR button.
Selects the maximum analog Betacam tape speed in
search mode.
Note
The maximum digital Betacam tape speed in search mode
is 50 times normal tape speed no matter what this setting is.
0: 35 times normal tape speed in shuttle mode using the
search dial and during fast forward and rewind.
1: 35 times normal tape speed during fast forward and
rewind. 24 times normal tape speed in shuttle mode
using the search dial.
2: 24 times normal tape speed in shuttle mode using the
search dial and during fast forward and rewind.
Selects the maximum analog Betacam tape speed in
search mode.
Note
The maximum digital Betacam tape speed in search mode
is 50 times normal tape speed no matter what this setting is.
0: 42 times normal tape speed in shuttle mode using the
search dial and during fast forward and rewind.
1: 42 times normal tape speed is the maximum tape speed
during fast forward and rewind. 24 times normal tape
speed in shuttle mode using the search dial.
2: 24 times normal tape speed in shuttle mode using the
search dial and during fast forward and rewind.
Selects the audio signal output to the MONITOR OUTPUT
connectors.
0: The audio signal selected by the AUDIO INPUT/
MONITOR SELECT buttons on the upper control panel
or the[F9](MON-L SEL) or [F10](MON-R SEL) button in
the PF2 menu factory setting) is output to the MONITOR
OUTPUT connectors.
1: The AFM audio (CH-3 and CH-4) is selected during
metal tape playback. The LNG audio (CH-1 and CH-2) is
selected during oxide tape playback. Signal output is in
stereo.
2: The audio signal selected by the AUDIO INPUT
MONITOR SELECT buttons on the upper control panel
or the [F9] (MON-L SEL) or [F10] (MON-R SEL) button in
the PF2 menu (factory setting) is output to the MONITOR
OUTPUT connectors. When the AFM audio is selected,
the LNG audio is output to the MONITOR OUTPUT
connector automatically when the variable speed
playback mode is activated.
Item number
Item
Settable range
[00] [off]
01 0.1 sec
02 0.2 sec
03 0.3 sec
04 0.4 sec
05 0.5 sec
06 0.6 sec
07 0.7 sec
08 0.8 sec
09 0.9 sec
10 1.0 sec
104
AUDIO MUTING
TIME
105
REFERENCE
SYSTEM ALARM
0 off
[1] [on]
Specifies whether or not to display a warning is output when
the video/audio reference signal selected by the [F2] (OUT
REF) button in the PF1 menu (factory setting) is not
supplied or is out of phase with the input video signal.
0: No warning is displayed.
1: Warning is displayed by a flashing STOP button.
106
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
CAPSTAN LOCK
[0] [switch select]
1 2FLD
2 4FLD
Selects the capstan servo lock mode.
0: The capstan servo lock mode is determined by the ALT/
[F5] (CAP LOCK) button menu on the lower control panel
while in the HOME menu.
1: The capstan servo locks every 2FLD (two fields)
regardless of the setting of the ALT/[F5] (CAP LOCK)
button setting on the lower control panel while in the
HOME menu.
2: The capstan servo locks every 4FLD (four fields)
regardless of the ALT/[F5] (CAP LOCK) button setting on
the lower control panel while in the HOME menu.
106
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
CAPSTAN LOCK
[0]
1
2
3
Selects the capstan servo lock mode.
0: The capstan servo lock mode is determined by the ALT/
[F5] (CAP LOCK) button on the lower control panel while
in the HOME menu.
1: The capstan servo locks every 2FLD (two fields)
regardless of the ALT/[F5] (CAP LOCK) button setting on
the lower control panel while in the HOME menu.
2: The capstan servo locks every 4FLD (four fields)
regardless of the ALT/[F5] (CAP LOCK) button setting on
the lower control panel while in the HOME menu.
3: The capstan servo locks every 8FLD (eight fields)
regardless of the ALT/[F5] (CAP LOCK) button setting on
the lower control panel while in the HOME menu.
107
REC INHIBIT
LAMP FLASHING
[0] [off]
1 on
Specifies whether the REC INHIBIT indicator lights or
flashes, when the ALT/[F1] (REC INH) button on the lower
control panel is set to off while in the HOME menu and the
REC inhibit plug on the back side of a cassette tape is
pressed down.
0: The REC INHIBIT indicator lights up.
1: The REC INHIBIT indicator flashes.
108
AUTO EE SELECT
[0] [stop/f.fwd/rew]
1 stop
Selects the modes in which the unit automatically changes
to E-E mode, for both audio and video signals, when a
digital cassette tape is inserted and the ALT/[F2] (PB/EE)
button in the HOME menu on the lower control panel is set
to PB/EE.
The unit changes to PB mode at all times when an analog
Betacam cassette tape is inserted, no matter what this
setting is.
0: Changes to E-E mode in stop/eject/fast forward/rewind
modes.
1: Changes to E-E in stop/eject modes.
[switch select]
2FLD
4FLD
8FLD
Function
Selects the audio muting duration when the unit is changed
to playback mode from still-picture mode while the VTR is in
stop mode or search mode.
The audio muting duration can be set in a range of 0
second (muting off) to 1.0 second, in 0.1 second steps.
A-11
Appendix
Appendix
Menu List
Item number
109
Item
FORCED EE
WHEN TAPE
UNTHREAD
Settable range
[0] [on]
1 off
Function
Specifies whether the unit automatically changes to PB/EE
mode whenever PB/EE is selected with the ALT/[F2] (PB/
EE) button on the lower control panel during tape threading
and unthreading modes and when tape is not inserted.
0: The ALT/[F2] (PB/EE) button in the HOME menu does
not control the PB/EE mode.
(The E-E mode signal is output at all times.)
1: The ALT/[F2] (PB/EE) button in the HOME menu controls
the PB/EE mode.
111
PROGRAM
PLAY
[0] [disable]
1 enable
Specifies whether program play mode is enabled or not.
0: Program play mode is disabled.
1: Program play mode is enabled.
115
(DVW-A500/1
and A500P/1)
PHASE LOCK IN
VARIABLE × 3
[0] [off]
1 on
116
JOG DIAL
RESPONSE
[0] [TYPE 1]
1 TYPE 2
2 TYPE 3
Specifies whether the capstan phase servo is locked during
the variable-speed mode of 3 times normal speed.
0: Capstan phase servo is not locked during the variablespeed mode of 3 times normal speed.
1: Capstan phase servo is locked during the variable-speed
mode of 3 times normal speed.
Selects the tape speed (VTR command) characteristics for
search dial rotation.
0: Tape speed changes linearly in a range of –1 to +1 times
normal tape speed.
1: Tape speed changes in a range of –3 to +3 times normal
tape speed as shown below in TYPE 2. (Tape speed
does not change when the search dial is within a range
of ±1 times normal tape speed.)
2: Tape speed changes linearly in a range of –3 to +3 times
normal tape speed as shown below in TYPE 3.
TYPE2
+3
TYPE3
speed
FWD
+3
speed
FWD
+1
RVS
-1
RVS
117
Appendix
CONTROL
PANEL
SELECTION
A-12
Appendix
(
)
[0] [sw selection EXT ]
1 parallel control
-3
FWD
rotation
RVS
FWD
rotation
RVS
-3
Specifies which control panel is enabled when the
CONTROL PANEL switch on the system setup panel is set
to ‘EXT’.
0: Only the control panel that is connected to the external
control connector on the connector panel is enabled.
1: Both the control panel of this unit and the equipment
connected to the external control connector on the
connector panel are enabled.
Item number
118
Item
Settable range
KEY INHIBIT
SWITCH
EFFECTIVE AREA
Sub Item
[0] [disable]
1 REMOTE
1 enable
SELECT
Function
The enabling or disabling of switches and buttons can be
independently specified through each of the following subitems when the [F1] (KEY INH) button on the lower control
panel is set to “on” while in the PANEL SETUP menu.
Specifies whether the REMOTE1 (9P) and REMOTE2 (50P)
button on the upper control panel are enabled or not.
0: REMOTE1/REMOTE2 buttons are disabled.
1: REMOTE1/REMOTE2 buttons are enabled.
[0] [disable]
1 enable
Specifies whether the INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons
on the upper control panel are enabled or not.
0: INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons are disabled.
1: INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons are enabled.
3 CONTROL
PANEL
[0] [disable]
1 edit
2 enable
Specifies which switches and buttons on the control panel
of this unit and the external control panel connected to this
unit are enabled.
0: All switches and buttons are disabled.
1: The switches and buttons related to editing function are
disabled.
2: All switches and buttons are enabled.
Sets the the tape speed range during variable-speed (VAR)
playback on the control panel of this unit.
0: The range of the tape speed is –1 to +3 times normal
speed.
1: The range of the tape speed is 0 to +1 time normal
speed.
CTL locks the tape transport during variable-speed
playback or shuttle playback.
0: CTL does not lock.
1: CTL locks the tape transport at speeds of –1, –0.5, 0.5,
1.0, and 2.0 times normal speed.
Sets the DT operation mode.
0: Field playback (Field DT mode).
1: Enters the frame playback mode (frame DT mode) when
the tape speed is 0 to +2 times normal speed.
As in the case of digital tape insertion (Item 108), the VTR
automatically changes to E-E mode from a VTR mode
(F.FWD, REW, STOP, etc) when an analog tape is inserted.
The change to E-E mode is only for video signals.
MUTE mode for audio signals.
0: The unit stays in playback mode when an analog tape is
inserted.
1: Item 108 is effective even when an analog tape is
inserted.
For details on item 108, refer to page A-11.
119
VARIABLE SPEED
LIMIT IN KEY
PANEL CONTROL
(
)
[0] [off –1 to +3 ]
1 on ( 0 to +1)
120
CTL LOCK IN
VAR/SHTL
[0] [off]
1 –1/–0.5/0.5/1.0/2.0
121
DT MODE
[0] [field]
1 frame (0 to +2)
122
(DVW-A500/1
and A500P/1)
AUTO EE WITH
ANALOG TAPE
(VIDEO ONLY)
[0] [disable]
1 enable
Appendix
A-13
Appendix
2 MON/INPUT
SEL
Menu List
Items Related to Remote Interface (200s)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
201
Item
PARA RUN
Settable range
[0] [disable]
1
enable
Function
Specifies whether two or more VTRs run in parallel as
they are synchronized or not.
0: Two or more VTRs are not synchronized.
1: Two or more VTRs are synchronized.
Note
To synchronized two or more VTRs in parallel, set the
item 201 in all VTRs to “1”.
CF FLAG REPLY
202
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1only)
[0]
1
[8F]
4F or 8F
Selects the field when the color frame lock is set to “1” in
the status data that is returned to the REMOTE1-IN (9P)
connector on the connector panel.
0: Field 8
1: Field 4 or 8
208
[0]
[SONY 9 pin protocol]
ESBUS
AUTO selection
Selects the type of the communication protocol for the
REMOTE1 (9P) connector on the connector panel.
0: SONY 9 pin protocol
1: EBU-SMPTE bus protocol
2: EBU-SMPTE bus and SONY 9 pin protocols are
automatically selected.
[8280]
I
82FE
8380
I
83FE
8480
I
84FE
I
I
FF80
I
FFFE
Allocates the bus for the ES BUS protocol when it is used
as the communication protocol for the REMOTE1
connector.
PROTOCOL FOR
REMOTE 1
1
2
209
ES BUS ADDRESS [8280]
I
82FE
8380
I
83FE
8480
I
84FE
I
I
FF80
I
FFFE
Appendix
A-14
Appendix
(Only even data are shown.)
Items Related to Editing (300s)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
Item
301
VAR SPEED
[0] [–1 to +3]
RANGE FOR
1 –1.15 to +3.45
SYNCHRONIZATION
Settable range
Function
Specifies the variable tape speed range when the variable
speed playback is executed by a remote control unit
connected to the REMOTE1 IN (9P) connector.
0 : –1 to +3 times normal tape speed
1 : –1.15 to +3.45 times normal tape speed
Note
When an editing control unit such as BVE-9000 is
connected for DT editing, select “1”.
When “1” is selected and the DT playback at a speed
exceeding –1 to +3 times nomal tape speed is attempted
during analog Betacam playback, the bottom of the picture
may partially disappear. This is not a malfunction.
Specifies whether capstan servo is re-locked in
deceleration mode or acceleration mode when the ALT/[F5]
(CAP LOCK) button in the HOME menu is set to 4FD
(DVW-A500/1 and 500/1) or 4FD or 8FD (DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1) .
0 : Capstan servo re-locks in deceleration mode.
1 : Capstan servo re-locks in acceleration mode.
302
CAPSTAN
RE-LOCKING
DIRECTION
[0] [deceleration]
1 acceleration
(DVW-A500/1 and
500/1)
0 deceleration
[1] [acceleration]
(DVW-A500P/1 and
500P/1)
304
EDIT FIELD
SELECT
[0] [1F]
1 2F
2 1F/2F
Specifies the timing for the start of editing in an edit mode.
0 : Tape editing starts from field 1 and ends at field 2.
1 : Tape editing starts from field 2 and ends at field 1.
2 : Tape editing is carried out according to the timing of
commands.
305
SYNC GRADE
[0] [accurate]
1 rough
Specifies the editing accuracy when performing editing in
phase-synchronized mode when the item 004 is set to “0”.
0 : Editing accuracy of ±0 frame
1 : Editing accuracy of ±1 frame
306
DMC INITIAL
SPEED
[00]
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
For details on item 004, refer to page A-8.
Specifies the initial tape speed that is set automatically
during DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) editing.
00 : The initial tape speed is determined by the rotation
angle of the search dial.
01 : Normal playback speed
02 : Tape is stopped.
03 to 13 : The initial tape speed is the selected search
speed.
Appendix
A-15
Appendix
[manual]
play
still
+0.03
+0.1
+0.2
+0.5
+1
+2
–0.03
–0.1
–0.2
–0.5
–1
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
307
AUTO-DELETION
FOR
INCONSISTENT
DATA
[0] [manual]
1 neg & excess
2 neg
Specifies the action taken when an edit point is incorrectly
set.
0 : a warning message is output on the display on the lower
control panel. Delete manually the unnecessary edit
points or correct the erroneous edit point manually.
1 : When an incorrect edit point is set, (i.e., an OUT point
located before an IN point, or AUDIO OUT point before
AUDIO IN point) the previously set edit point is deleted
automatically.
When excessive edit points are set, the previously set
edit point is deleted automatically.
2 : When an incorrect edit point is set (i.e., an OUT point
located before an IN point, or AUDIO OUT point located
before AUDIO IN point) the previously set edit point is
deleted automatically.
When excessive edit points are set, a warning message
appears in the display on the lower control panel.
Note
Editing is not performed on the VTR while a warning
message aprears in the display.
308
(with optional
BKDW-505 for
DVW-500/1
series, and
BKDW-506 for
DVW-500P/1
series)
SELECTION OF
STD/NON-STD
FOR COMPOSITE
VIDEO IN
[0]
1
2
309
SERVO/AV
REFERENCE SEL
[0] [auto 1]
1 auto 2
2 external
Appendix
A-16
Appendix
[auto]
forced STD
forced non-STD
Select the STD or NON-STD signal mode according to the
composite video input signal.
0 : Detect automatically whether the input luminance signal
and chrominance signal are interleaved or not. If
interleaved, the STD mode is selected. If not
interleaved, the NON-STD mode is selected.
1 : The unit is in the STD mode at all times.
2 : The unit is in the NON-STD mode at all times. Use this
mode when color framing of the video input signal is not
stable.
The servo reference is selected by the following settings.
0: During recording, the analog component/composite or
digital video input signal is selected as the servo
reference signal.
During playback, the signal selected by the [F2] (OUT
REF) button in the PF1 menu (factory setting) on the
lower control panel is selected as the servo reference
signal. When the signal selected by the [F2] (OUT REF)
button in the PF1 menu (factory setting) on the lower
control panel is not connected, the internal reference
signal is selected.
1: When the [F2] (OUT REF) button in the PF1 menu is set
to “ref”, and the unit is in edit preset mode, the reference
signal for video/audio signal processing is locked to the
video input signal.
2: SYS1 ROM version 1.06 and higher
The servo reference is forced into the EXT mode.
Item number
Item
Settable range
310
REC INHIBIT
[0]
1
2
3
[all]
crash
video
audio
Function
Specifies the extent of the record inhibit function.
0 : Recording is disabled.
1 : Normal recording is disabled, but recording in assemble
or insert edit mode is possible.
2 : Recording of video and CTL signal is disabled.
3 : Recording of audio and CTL signal is disabled
Note
The REC INHIBIT indicator on the lower control panel
lights up when the setting is “1” or “2”, and flashes when an
operation prohibited by the setting is attempted.
Items 311 through 315 describe the analog audio edit preset
during editing mentioned on right.
ANALOG AUDIO
0 no definition
EDIT PRESET
[1] [analog ch 1]
REPLACE FOR CH 2 analog ch 2
1
3 analog ch 1 + ch 2
312
ANALOG AUDIO
0 no definition
EDIT PRESET
1 analog ch 1
REPLACE FOR CH [2] [analog ch 2]
2
3 analog ch 1 + ch 2
313
ANALOG AUDIO
[0]
EDIT PRESET
1
REPLACE FOR CH 2
3
3
314
ANALOG AUDIO
[0] [no definition]
EDIT PRESET
1 analog ch 1
REPLACE FOR CH 2 analog ch 2
4
3 analog ch 1 + ch 2
315
ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CUE
[0]
1
2
3
[no definition]
analog ch 1
analog ch 2
analog ch 1 + ch 2
[no definition]
analog ch 1
analog ch 2
analog ch 1 + ch 2
Sets the channel-1 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
0 : Not defined.
1 : As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
2 : As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
3 :As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2
preset.
Sets the channel-2 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
0 : Not defined.
1 : As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
2 : As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
3 : As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2
preset.
Sets the channel-3 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
0 : Not defined.
1 : As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
2 : As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
3 : As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2
preset.
Sets the channel-4 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
0 : Not defined.
1 : As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
2 : As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
3 : As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2
preset.
Sets the analog audio channel (longitudinal) edit preset of
the VTR to ON or OFF according to the analog audio
preset specified on an editor or remote controller.
0 : Not defined.
1 : As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
2 : As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
3 : As determined by analog channel 1 or analog ch 2
preset.
Appendix
A-17
Appendix
311
The follwing items specifies the allocation of each channel
for the analog audio preset of the editor or remote
controller when the digital audio signals from the VTR is
edited on an editor (BVE-600, etc.) or remote controller
with digital audio edit preset control functions.
Menu List
Item number
316
Item
CONFIDENCE
PB MODE
Settable range
SYS 1,SYS 2 ROM
version 1.30 and higher
0 MODE 1 : Rec/Edit
[1] MODE 2 : Rec/Edit/
E.preset
2
MODE 3 : Rec only
Function
Specifies the confidence playback mode when the [F2]
(CONFI) button in the HOME menu is set to ON.
0: VTR changes to CONFI playback mode during recording
and editing mode.
1: Same as Mode 1, except VTR changes to the confidence
playback mode also when EDIT preset is ‘ON’ during
normal playback.
2: Confidence control is operative only in crash recording
mode.
Note
When previewing during an automatic edit, the VTR
changes to ADVANCE playback mode no matter what this
item is set to.
317
AUDIO EDIT
MODE
0 cut edit
[1] [cross fade]
2 fade in/out
Specifies the type of editing for digital audio signals.
0: Cut editing (discontinuity in audio signal may result at the
join, causing noise.)
1: Cross-fade (see figure below.)
2: Fade-out and fade-in (see figure below.)
DATA No. 1
IN/OUT
t
DATA No.2
IN/OUT
t
Note
The “t” in the figures above is the time set by item 803.
Appendix
318
EDIT RETRY
0 off
[1] [on]
319
PREREAD
SELECT
[0] [audio/video]
1 audio only
2 video only
A-18
Appendix
Set this item when the VTR is used as a recorder during
VTR-to-VTR editing. Specifies the action taken when the
recorder fails to synchronize with the player VTR.
0: Editing is not executed and the VTR enters STOP mode.
1: The VTR automatically repeats the editing again (up to
two times twice).
Specifies PREREAD operations.
0: Prereads both audio and video signals.
1: Prereads audio signals only.
2: Prereads video signals only.
Preread operations are specified and executed by the [F1]
(PRE READ) button in the HOME menu or a 9-pin
REMOTE1-IN connector command.
Items Related to Prerolling (400s)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
401
FUNCTION MODE
AFTER CUE-UP
[0] [stop]
1 still
Selects the operation mode that the VTR changes to after
completing a cue up operation.
0 : Enters stop mode.
1 : Enters still-picture mode (search mode).
Note
When setting the standard constant on the editor and
control the unit, set to “0.”
403
AUTOMATIC
PREROLL
REFERENCE
ENTRY
[0] [disable]
1 enable
Specifies whether IN point is automatically set when the
PREROLL button is pressed, in the case no IN point has
been set at the start of a preroll operation.
0 : IN point is not set automatically.
1 : IN point is set automatically.
404
CUEUP BY TC
0 capstan only
[1] [reel/capstan]
The setting of this item is valid only when the [F1] (TIMER
SEL) button in the TC menu is set to TC or UBIT.
0 : The tape runs with the pinch ON during cue up. (The
maximum tape speed is ten times normal tape speed.)
1 : The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during cue up.
When the tape nears the cue up point and tape speed
drops to slow, the pinch turns ON.
Select “0” when the tape contains a discontinuity in its
time code signal and the part that is prerolled contains the
discontinuity. (Prerolling is performed by interpolating the
time code preceding the discontinuity using the CTL
signals.)
405
CUEUP BY CTL
[0] [capstan only]
1 reel/capstan
The setting of this item is valid only when the [F1] (TIMER
SEL) button in the TC menu is set to CTL.
0 : The tape runs with the pinch ON state during cue up.
(The maximum tape speed is ten times normal tape
speed.)
1 : The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during cue up.
When the tape nears the cue up point and tape speed
drops to slow, the pinch turns ONa).
Select “0” when editing precision has priority.
Appendix
A-19
Appendix
a) When this unit is controlled by an editor (BVE-2000/BVE-9100, etc), and the seting is “1”, cue up operations are done at
high speed.
Menu List
Items Related to Recording Protection (500s)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Appendix
Item number
Item
Settable range
501
STILL TIMER
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
[14]
15
0.5 sec
5 sec
10 sec
20 sec
30 sec
40 sec
50 sec
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
[8 min]
30 min
Select the amount of time elapse after which the VTR to
automatically enters tape-protect mode, for the purpose of
protecting the video head and tape.
This is the time between stopping of the tape (stop mode or
still-picture mode in search mode) and the change to
tape protection mode.
The selectable range of time is from 0.5 second to 30
minutes.
502
TAPE
PROTECTION
MODE FROM
SEARCH
[0]
1
2
[step fwd]
standby off
tension release
Specifies the tape-protect mode the VTR changes to from
still-picture mode while searching.
The unit enters automatically the specified tape-protect
mode after the time specified in item 501 has elapsed.
0 : A two-second step advance is repeated in forward
direction at 1/30 times normal tape speed.
1 : The VTR enters standby off mode (standby is
canceled).
2 : The VTR enters tension release mode (tape tension is
released).
503
TAPE
PROTECTION
MODE FROM
STOP
[0]
1
[standby off]
tension release
Specifies the tape-protect mode the VTR changes to from
the stop mode.
The unit automatically enters the specified tape-protect
mode from the stop mode after the elapse of time specified
by the item 501.
0: The VTR enters standby off mode (standby is
canceled).
1: The VTR enters tension release mode (tape tension is
released).
504
DRUM ROTATION
IN STANDBY OFF
[0]
1
[off]
on
Sets the drum rotation to on or off during standby-off mode.
0: Drum rotation is stopped.
1: Drum rotation continues.
505
STILL TENSION
[0]
1
[normal]
loose
Sets the tape tension control in still-picture mode.
0: Maintains the tape tension that ensures uneffected
playback even in still-picture mode.
(This is the normal setting for VTR operations.)
1: Sets the tape tension lower than that of the “0” setting
after the VTR enters still-picture mode. In this case,
picture playback is not ensured. (For long standbys
(e.g., LMS) in still-picture mode, this setting is
recommended.)
A-20
Appendix
Function
Items Related to the Time Code Generator (600s)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
Item
Settable range
601
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
VITC POSITION
SEL-1
12 12 line
I
I
[16] [16 line]
I
I
20 20 line
Specifies the line the VITC signal is inserted into.
The VITC signal can be inserted in any line from line 12
through line 20.
9 9 line
I
I
[19] [19 line]
I
I
22 22 line
Specifies the line the VITC signal is inserted into.
The VITC signal can be inserted in any line from line 9
through line 22.
601
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
602
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
VITC POSITION
SEL-1
VITC POSITION
SEL-2
602
(for DVWA500P/1 and
500P/1)
VITC POSITION
SEL-2
603
ID CODE SET
TCG REGEN
MODE
9 9.322 line
I
I
[21] [21.334 line]
22 22.335 line
00000000
I
FFFFFFFF
[0] TC&UB
1 TC
2 UB
Note
VITC can be inserted into two positions through item 601
and item 602.
Note
VITC can be inserted into two positions through the item
601 and item 602.
Specifies the line the VITC signal is inserted into.
The VITC signal can be inserted in any line from line 12
through line 20.
Note
The VITC can be inserted into two position through item
601 and item 602.
Specifies the line the VITC signal is inserted into.
The VITC signal can be inserted in any line from line 9
through line 22.
Note
The VITC can be inserted into two position through item
601 and item 602.
Sets the ID code.
Note
To set the ID code
Enter the ID code using the numeric buttons, then press
the SET button.
Specifies the type of signal to be regenerated when the
time code generator is in the regeneration mode (i.e., when
the [F7] (TCG MODE) button in the TC menu is set to regen
or when the unit is in automatic edit mode).
0 : Both the time code and user bit signals are regenerated.
1 : Only the time code signal is regenerated.
2 : Only the user bit signal is regenerated.
Appendix
A-21
Appendix
605
12 12 line
I
I
[18] [18 line]
I
I
20 20 line
Function
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
606
[0]
TC OUTPUT
SIGNAL IN REGEN 1
MODE
[off tape]
regen
607
U-BIT BINARY
GROUP FLAG
[0]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[000: not specified]
001: iso character
010: unassigned-1
011: unassigned-2
100: unassigned-3
101: page/line
110: unassigned-4
111: unassigned-5
608
PHASE
CORRECTION
[0]
1
[off]
on
609
TCG CF FLAG
[0] [off]
1 on
2 auto
Function
Specifies the signal output to the TIME CODE OUT
connector when the internal time code generator is in a
mode for regenerating the playback time code (i.e., when
the [F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu is set to int
and the [F7] (TCG MODE) button is set to regen, or when
the VTR is in the automatic edit mode).
0 : The playback time code signal is output to the TIME
CODE OUT connector without regeneration.
1 : The playback time code signal is output to the TIME
CODE OUT connector after regeneration only when the
VTR is in playback mode.
Specifies the user bit in the time code signal that is
generated by the time code generator.
0: Character setting is not specified.
1: 8-bit character in compliance with ISO 646 and ISO
2022.
2: Unassigned
3: Unassigned
4: Unassigned
5: Page/line multiplexed system of SMPTE 262M
6: Unassigned
7: Unassigned
Specifies whether the phase correction control of the LTC
signal generated by the time code generator is applied or
not.
0: The phase correction control is not applied.
1: The phase correction control is applied.
Specfies whether the color frame (CF) flag is set (ON) or
not set (OFF) in the blank bit of the time code data.
0: Color frame flag is set OFF.
1: Color frame flag is set ON.
2: Color frame flag is set ON or OFF depending on the
phase relationship of the color framing between the
recorded video signal and the time code signal.
Appendix
Note
When this item is set to “2”, the color frame flag is
determined by the operating mode of the time code
generator.
• When INT PRESET mode (i.e., the EXT/INT switch is set
to int, the REGEN/PRESET switch to prst, and the VTR is
in a mode other than automatic edit mode), the time code
signal is generated with color frame-locked to the video
signal, and the color frame flag is ON.
• When INT REGEN mode (i.e., when the EXT/INT switch
is set to int, the REGEN/PRESET switch to regen, and
the VTR is in automatic edit mode), or EXT mode (i.e.,
EXT/INT switch is in ext), color frame flag is OFF.
A-22
Appendix
Item number
Item
Settable range
610
REGEN CONTROL [0] auto (assem & insert) edit
1 auto assemble edit
MODE
2 manual
3 assemble & insert
Function
Specifies whether the time code signal is automatically
regenerated or not, during editing using the control panel of
the VTR.
0: When the VTR is used as a recorder for editing, the time
code generator automatically regenerates the time code
signal using the time code on the tape during assemble
or insert edit no matter what the setting of the [F6] (TCG
SOURCE) button in the TC menu is.
1: When the VTR is used as a recorder for ediing, the time
code generator automatically regenerates the time code
signal using time code of the time code generator on the
tape during assemble edit only, no matter what the
setting of the [F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC
menu is.
2: The time code generator operates in accordance with the
setting of the [F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC
menu, regardless of the operating mode of the VTR.
3: The time code generator regenerates the time code
signal in the off-tape LTC signal when edit preset is set
to ON (assemble/insert), regardless of local or remote
control.
Appendix
Appendix
A-23
Menu List
Items Related to the Video Control (700s)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number
Item
Settable range
701
SELECTION OF
VIDEO/SYNC
DELAY
[0]
1
703
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
BLANK LINE
SELECT
[sync delay]
video delay
Sub item
0
Function
In E-E mode, the video output signal is delayed with
respect to the input signal by a duration equal to the time
required for video circuit processing (6H). This item
specifies whether the sync signal is delayed by the same
amount as the video output signal, or is output with the
same timing as the input signal when outputting video
signal with the sync signal.
0: Sync signal is delayed.
1: Sync signal is not delayed.
Specifies whether blanking is on or off during the vertical
blanking of the video signal.
The lines that are blanked can be individually specified.
The Y/C signal and ODD/EVEN field are blanked
simultaneously.
0: Blanking is specified for each line.
1: All lines selectable by this menu item are blanked, no
matter what the other sub item settings are.
2: All lines selectable by this menu item are not blanked, no
matter what the other sub item settings are.
All Line
[0] [– – –]
1 blank
2 throu
12 Line 12
I
I
19 Line 19
[0] [blank]
2 throu
0: Blanked
2: Not blanked
20 Line 20
[0] [blank]
1 half
2 throu
0: Blanked
1: Half-blanked
2: Not blanked
Note
For analog Betacam VTRs (i.e., Betacam SP):
Blanking can be specified for lines 12 to 20. The chroma
signal, however, is automatically blanked for lines 12 to 15
(even if blanking of the luminance signal is cancelled).
703
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
Appendix
Specifies whether blanking is on or off during the vertical
blanking of the video signal.
The lines that are blanked can be individually specified.
The Y/C signal and ODD/EVEN field are blanked
simultaneously.
BLANK LINE
SELECT
Sub item
All Line
[0] [– – –]
1 blank
2 throu
0: Blanking is specified for each line.
1: All lines selectable by this menu item are blanked, no
matter what the other sub item settings are.
2: All lines selectable by this menu item are not blanked, no
matter what the other sub item settings are.
9 Line 9
I
I
22 Line 22
[0] [blank]
2 throu
0: Blanked
2: Not blanked
23 Line 23
[1] [half]
2 throu
1: Half-blanked
2: Not blanked
0
Notes
• For digital Betacam VTRs:
Blanking can be specified for lines 9 to 23. Line 23,
however, is half-blanked.
• For analog Betacam VTRs (i.e., Betacam SP):
Blanking can be specified for lines 12 to 21. The chroma
signal, however, is automatically blanked for lines 12 to
15 (even if blanking of the luminance signal is cancelled).
Line 23 is half-blanked.
A-24
Appendix
Item number
Item
704
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1 with
optional
accessory
BKDW-505)
DECODE Y/C
SEP MODE
Settable range
Function
Sub item
0
[1]
BPF
&
[B W]
Specifies the Y/C separation mode during vertical blanking.
Can be specified independently for each line from line 12 to
20. Valid only when the BKDW-505 Analog Composite
Decoder Board is installed.
0: Signals are processed as Y/C.
1: Signals are processed as luminance signals.
9 Line 9.332
I
I
22 Line 22.335
0
[1]
BPF
&
[B W]
705
EDGE
SUBCARRIER
REDUCER MODE
[0] [auto]
1 forced ESR on
Specifies the Y/C separation mode during vertical blanking.
Can be specified independently for each line from line 12 to
20. Valid only when the BKDW-506 Analog Composite
Decoder Board is installed.
0: Signals are processed as Y/C.
1: Signals are processed as luminance signals.
During recording and playback of composite signals, the
ESR (Edge Subcarrier Reducer) automatically goes on or
off, depending on the VTR operation. Through this item,
the ESR can also be set to stay on all the time when the
color edge has more noise, as when recording a nonstandard signal.
0: The ESR turns on and off automatically.
1: The ESR stays on all the time.
706
VERTICAL
BLANKING V
SHIFT
[0] [on]
1 off
12 Line 12
I
I
20 Line 20
DECODE Y/C
704
(DVW-A500P/1 SEP MODE
and 500P/1 with
optional
accessory
BKDW-506)
Sub item
FORCED
VERTICAL
INTERPORATION
OFF
[0] [auto]
1 forced YADD off
Note
In a Y-add operation, vertical interpolation is conducted
during DT playback in order to decrease vertical movement
of the playback picture.
Specifies whether Y-add operation mode is automatically
turned on during DT playback or not.
0: Y-add operation mode is automatically turned on.
1: Y-add operation mode is off all the time.
Appendix
A-25
Appendix
707
During the Y-add operation mode, the playback signal is
shifted by 1H to suppress vertical movement of the
playback picture when the playback is an odd field and the
reference signal an even field.
This item is specified whether the 1H shift is applied or not
during the V-blanking period. If it is, the video playback
signal appears sporadically on line 21 during DT playback.
0: The shift is applied during V-blanking.
1: The shift is not applied during V-blanking.
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
708
CHROMA PHASE
ROTATION MODE
[0]
Specifies the phase rotation domain of the chroma phase
(hue) control.
The output level of SIF, component, and composite signals
are simultaneously modified in accordance with the
following modes:
0: When monitoring the composite output level of the VTR
with a composite vector monitor (Sony Tektronix 1750
for DVW-A500/1 and 500/1, and 1751 for DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1), rotating the CHROMA PHASE (hue)
control changes only the chroma phase (hue), but not
the chroma level.
1: When monitoring the component output level of the VTR
with a component vector monitor (Sony Tektronix
WFM300A), rotating the CHROMA PHASE (hue) control
changes only the chroma phase (hue), but not the
chroma level.
1
709
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1 only)
U/V (composite)
domain
Pb/Pr (component)
domain
Specifies the D-1 or Betacam format as the input/output
format for analog component signals.
DECODE Y/C SEP
MODE
Sub item
710
0
INPUT CAV
LEVEL
[0] [B-CAM]
1 D-1
1
OUTPUT CAV
LEVEL
[0]
1
INTERNAL VIDEO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
[0]
1
2
3
Appendix
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A-26
Appendix
Format
Color Bars Y video
Y sync
R-Y/B-Y
D-1 CAV
with 100/0/
100/0 color
bars
700 mV
300 mV
700 mV
Betacam
with 100/
7.5/77/7.5
color bars
714 mV
286 mV 700 mV
Analog component input format
0: Betacam format
1: D-1 format
Analog component output format
0: Betacam format
1: D-1 format
Specifies
the type of test signal to be output from the
[OFF]
VTR’s internal test signal generator.
100% Color Bars
When OFF is selected, no test signal is output and the
75% Color Bars
75% Reverse Color VTR operates normally.
For settings other than OFF, hold down the lit AUDIO
Bars
INPUT/MONITOR SELECT button for 3 seconds or more.
Bowtie
All the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons light
Pulse & Bar
and the internal test signal generator operates. The
Multi Burst
selected test signal (1 through 17) is output from the VTR.
H Sweep
The output signal can also be recorded.
5 step
Ramp
Shallow Ramp
Red
50% Flat
100% Flat
Black Burst
SDI Check Field
Line 330
(DVW-A500P/1 and
500P/1 only)
Test singal NTC7
(DVW-A500/1 and
500/1 only)
[B-CAM]
D-1
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
712
VIDEO PROCESS
ON CAP LOCK
2 FIELD
[0] [off]
1 on
When 2 FLD is selected by the ALT/[F5] (CAP LOCK) button
in the HOME menu, or by the item 106 “CAPSTAN LOCK”,
this item specifies whether the picture shift in 2-field mode
playback applies or not.
0: Picture shift does not apply.
1: Picture shift applies.
Note
When recording composite signals, the composite input
signal is first converted to a component digital signal by
decoder (optional BKDW-505 for DVW-A500/1 and 500/1, or
BKDW-506 for DVW-A500P/1 and 500P/1) before it is
recorded.
To eliminate the adverse effect of the residual chroma
subcarrier component in the Y signal (the result of Y/C
separation), 4-field color framing is normally conducted for
playback (for NISC) or 8-field (for PAL). This VTR, however,
is able to produce high picture quality through automatic
shifting of the playback picture in the H direction even with 2field (for NISC) or 2- or 4-field (for PAL) playback.
713
VIDEO SETUP
(DVW-A500/1
REFERENCE
and 500/1 only) LEVEL
Sub item
0 MASTER
LEVEL
[1]
|
11
|
15
%
[0.0 ]
7.5%
10.0%
(in 0.5% steps)
[0] [MASTER]
1 0.0%
|
10.0%
15
(in 0.5% steps)
2 INPUT VBLK
CONT
[0] [remove]
1 throu
3 BATACAM PB
LEVEL
[0] [MASTER]
1 0.0%
|
10.0%
15
(in 0.5% steps)
4 OUTPUT LEVEL [0] [MASTER]
1 0.0%
|
10.0%
15
(in 0.5% steps)
714
VIDEO ADJUST
RANGE
[0] [–3 to +3 dB]
1 Wide
Specifies the variable range of the VIDEO and CHROMA
level when K19 is set to LOCAL.
0: –3 to +3 dB
1: –∞ to +3 dB
Appendix
A-27
Appendix
1 INPUT LEVEL
The sub items in this setting specify the amount to be
subtracted from the setup level in the case of the recording
signal and Betacam playback signal, or the amount to be
added to the setup level in the case of a component output
signal.
The settings for the recording signal (i.e., input signal),
Betacam playback signal, and composite output signal (i.e.,
output signal) are made separately.
When the input signal, Betacam playback signal, and output
signal have all been set to Master (i.e., they are displayed as
MASTER), the level specified by the MASTER LEVEL sub
item (0% to 10.0%) is subtracted from the setup level of the
input and Betacam playback signals, and added to the setup
level of the output signal.
The subtraction of setup level for the input signal is only done
for video input signals with a V/S ratio of 10:4, Betacam CAV
input signals (set by menu), and D-2 format input signals
(Option), and not for other signals.
Subtraction of the setup level for input signals can be
disabled by setting CNT of the V.REMOTE menu (displayed
as REMOTE) to OFF.
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
The video process control is described from the item 715 to
721.
Function
The video processing is controlled according to the setting
of the following menu items.
To apply the settings of items 715 to 721, set K19 to “setup
menu.”
Appendix
715
VIDEO GAIN
CONTROL
preset: 800 H
0000 0 (HEX)
|
|
(
)
[0800] [800 HEX ]
|
|
0B50 B50 (HEX)
Sets the video output level.
716
CHROMA GAIN
CONTROL
preset: 800 H
0000 0 (HEX)
|
|
(
)
[0800] [800 HEX ]
|
|
0B50 B50 (HEX)
Sets the chroma output level.
717
CHROMA
PHASE
CONTROL
preset: 80 H
718
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
SETUP LEVEL
preset: 110 H
0000 0 (HEX)
|
|
(
)
[0110] [110 HEX ]
|
|
0220 220 (HEX)
Sets the setup level.
718
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
BLACK LEVEL
preset: 110 H
0000 0 (HEX)
|
|
[0110] [110 HEX ]
(
)
|
|
0220 220 (HEX)
Sets the black level.
719
SYSTEM PHASE
SYNC
preset: 80 H
0000 0 (HEX)
|
|
(
)
[0080] [80 HEX ]
|
|
00FF FF (HEX)
Sets the SYNC control.
720
SYSTEM PHASE
SC
preset: 0 H
[0000] [0 HEX ]
(
)
|
|
03FF 3FF (HEX)
Sets the SC control.
721
(DVW-A500/1
and A500P/1)
Y/C DELAY
preset: 800 H
0000
|
[0800]
|
0FFF
Sets the amount of Y/C delay amount during analog
Betacam playback.
A-28
Appendix
0
|
[80]
|
FF
0 (HEX)
|
(
)
[80 HEX ]
|
FF (HEX)
0 (HEX)
|
(
)
[800 HEX ]
|
FFF (HEX)
Sets the chroma phase (hue).
Item number
Item
722
REMOTE VIDEO
CONTROL MODE
Settable range
Function
[0] [composite]
Specifies the type of video process control via the Sony 91 component (Y-R, B) pin remote interface.
0: composite (Video, Chroma, Hue)
1: component (Y, PB PR)
Note
Hue cannot be controlled in component mode via 9-pin
remote interface. Hue should be controlled by menu or by
BVR-50.
723
Specifies whether the blanking is on or off during the
vertical blanking of video input signal.
The blanking line can be selected independently. Y/C and
odd/even signals are blanked simultaneously. The input
signals blanked by specification of these sub items are
recorded on tape.
INPUT VIDEO
BLANK
Sub item
0
726
[0] [– – –]
1 blank
2 throu
0: Blanking is specified for each line.
1: All lines selectable by this menu item are blanked, no
matter what the other sub item settings are.
2: All lines selectable by this menu item are not blanked, no
matter what the other sub item settings are.
12 LINE 12
|
|
20 LINE 20
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
0 blank
[2] [throu]
0: Blanked
2: Not blanked
0 blank
9 LINE 9.32
[2] [throu]
|
|
22 LINE 22.335
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
0: Blanked
2: Not blanked
VIDEO INPUT
AGC/MANUAL
0 AGC
[1] [manual]
Sets the AGC to on or off (manual) for video input signal.
0: The AGC is on.
1: The AGC is off (manual).
VIDEO INPUT
MANUAL LEVEL
0 0 (HEX)
|
|
(
)
[80] [80 HEX ]
|
|
FF FF (HEX)
Set video input signal level when the item 724 is set to “1”.
H BLANKING
WIDTH
[0] [narrow]
1 wide
Sets the horizontal blanking width of the video output signal.
When analog blanking is selected, the horizontal blanking
width conforms to the RS170A standard (for DVW-A500/1
and 500/1) or CCIR624-3 standard (DVW-A500P/1 and
500/1). Normally, a wide blanking width and a narrowed
picture are used. During editing, “0” is recommended; in
transmission, select “1” to output the signal in conformity
with the respective standard.
0: Digital (narrow) blanking
1: Analog (wide) blanking
Appendix
A-29
Appendix
724
(with optional
BKDW-505 for
DVW-A500/1
and 500/1, and
BKDW-506 for
DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
725
(with optional
BKDW-505 for
DVW-A500/1
and 500/1, and
BKDW-506 for
DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
ALL LINE
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
727
VIDEO INPUT
AGC/MANUAL
[0] [internal]
1 external switcher
Sets the output phase for the video playback signal in edit
preset mode.
0: Video playback signal phase is identical to that in E-E
mode.
Choose this setting during single VTR editing or
previewing the VTR output signal with the monitor
function.
1: Video playback signal phase is identical to that of the
video input signal or video signal from an external
switcher.
Choose this setting when previewing the video output
signal of the VTR through an external switcher. This will
prevent the shifting of picture at IN/OUT points.
However, the editing results are normal no matter which
setting is selected.
Note
• When “external switcher” is selected:
The operation on the VTR is treated as editing operation when the unit receives a CONFI ON control signal from the control
panel or a remote controller.
At this time, playback signal phase is identical to that of the video input or video signal from the external switcher.
When CONFI play is disabled by setting of the item 316 (MODE 3: REC ONLY), the phase of the playback signal is identical
to that of the output phase in E-E mode.
• When using an editor such as the BVE-800:
Some editors such as the BVE-800 do not operate CONFI ON control (selecting a playback head) when editing.
When using these units and this setting is “external switcher”, shifting of picture or muting/discontinuity in the audio may
occur at the IN point/OUT point when editing.
When this problem occurs, set this item to “internal”, or set the VTR to CONFI ON mode through the VTR control panel.
However, the editing result is normal no matter what this setting is.
Appendix
A-30
Appendix
Items Related to the Audio Control (800s)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number
801
Item
DIGITAL JOG
SOUND
Settable range
0 off
[1] [on]
Function
Turns the digital jog sound on or off.
0: Digital jog sound is turned off.
Audio signals of digital channels for which speed
compensation has not been conducted are output even
in still-picture mode.
1: Digital jog sound is turned on.
802
DIGITAL AUDIO
MUTE IN
SHUTTLE MODE
[0] [off]
1 cueup or preroll
2 full
Sets the muting conditions for digital audio signals during
shuttle playback.
However, the digital audio signal is muted no matter what
this setting is when the tape speed is 24 times normal
speed or more.
0: Not muted.
1: Muted during cue-up or preroll operations.
2: Muted in shuttle mode.
803
DIGITAL AUDIO
FADE TIME
0
[1]
2
3
4
5
6
7
804
AUDIO CH3/4
INPUT SOURCE
ARRANGE
5 ms
[10 ms]
15 ms
20 ms
25 msa)
50 msb)
85 ms
115 msc)
Note
Processing for cross fading, fading-in, and fading-out starts
after an IN or OUT point. This item specifies rewriting
during recording following the OUT point. Rewriting of one
field occurs even when the minimum setting (5 ms) is
selected. When CUT is selected in item 317 to prevent this
from happening, a discontinuity in the audio signal occurs.
There is, however, no effect on the recording of the video
signal.
a) The cross fade time is 24 ms.
b) The actual fade time is 49 ms.
c) The actual fade time is 114 ms.
Select the input signal for digital audio channels 3 and 4.
0: The signal that is selected by the upper control panel is
input to channels 3 and 4.
1: The signal to be recorded in channel 1 is recorded in
channel 3.
2: The signal to be recorded in channel 2 is recorded in
channel 4.
3: The signal to be recorded in channel 1 is recorded in
channel 3 while the signal to be recorded in channel 2 is
recorded in channel 4.
Note
The edit preset for channels 3 and 4 is completely
independent. Even if this item is set to “1” and insert editing
is performed with edit preset for channel 1 only, no signal is
recorded in channel 3.
The recording level is determined by the level control of the
input channels used as the source when “1” through “3” are
selected. There is no level control for channels 3 and 4.
The level control for LINE OUT and MONITOR OUT is
completely independent in E-E, CONFI and PB modes
even when the setting is “1”, “2” or “3”.
Appendix
A-31
Appendix
[0] [CH3/CH4 : SW/SW]
1 CH3/CH4 : CH1/
SW
2 CH3/CH4 : SW/
CH2
3 CH3/CH4 : CH1/
CH2
Specifies the fade processing time during cross-fading or
fading-in/out of digital audio signals.
Menu List
Item number
805
Item
AUDIO MONITOR
OUTPUT MIXING
Settable range
0 add
[1] [rms]
2 average
Function
Specifies the type of audio mixing to be conducted on the
digital audio signal or Betacam playback analog audio
signal output to the MONITOR OUTPUT connector.
0: Simple addition
1: Multiplied average
2: Simple average
Note
When the CUE channel signal (a digital Betacam analog
audio signal) is output to the monitor, signals are mixed by
simple addition.
806
LEVEL METER
SCALE
[0] [peak 0 dB]
1 reference 0 dB
807
AUDIO OUTPUT
PHASE
preset: 80H
0 0 (HEX)
I
I
[80] 80 (HEX)
I
I
FF FF (HEX)
808
INTERNAL AUDIO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
[0]
1
2
[off]
silence
1 kHz sine
Specifies the mode in which the digital audio level is
displayed.
0: Displays minus audio levels with the maximum level set
at 0 dB.
1: Displays plus and minus audio levels with the reference
level set at 0 dB.
Note
The cue channel level is always displayed with the
reference level set at 0 dB. In the Betacam playback mode,
all channel levels are displayed with the reference level set
at 0 dB no matter what this setting is.
Sets the output timing for the digital audio playback signal
(SIF and AES/EBU only). The 80H setting specifies the
reference position.
A setting lower than 80H advances the output timing, and a
setting higher than 80H delays the output timing.
(80H = 128 samples, or approx. 2.7 ms, with 1 sample =
approx. 20 µs)
Specifies the operation of the internal audio test signal
generator.
0: The internal audio test signal generator does not oprate.
1: Silent signal
2: 1 kHz signal output (1 kHz –20 dB FS sine wave is
supplied to all audio inputs.)
Appendix
In modes other than off:
• Press the INPUT SELECT button on the upper control
panel so that it lights up (the VTR enters AUDIO INPUT
SELECT mode).
• When one of the CH1 AUDIO INPUT SELECT buttons
(SIF, AES/EBU L, ANALOG R) is held down for more than
three seconds, the digital audio input signals of all
channels are replaced by the internal audio signal.
A-32
Appendix
Item number
809
Item
AUDIO LEVEL
METER DIMMER
CONTROL
810
AUDIO EDIT
PREVIEW
SWITCHER
Settable range
[0] [0]
I
I
7
7
[0] [internal]
1
external switcher
Function
Specifies the brightness of the audio level meter.
0 is the brightest level.
7 is the darkest level.
Sets the output phase for the audio playback signal in
edit preset mode.
0 : Audio playback signal phase is identical to that in E-E
mode.
Choose this setting during single VTR editing or
previewing the VTR output signal with the monitor
function.
1 : Audio playback signal phase is identical to that of the
video input signal or video signal from an external
switcher.
Choose this setting when previewing the audio output
signal of the VTR through an external switcher. This
will prevent the muting/discontinuity in the audio at
AUDIO IN/OUT points.
However, the editing results are normal no matter
which setting is selected.
Note
• When “external switcher” is selected:
The operation on the VTR is treated as editing operation when the unit receives a CONFI ON control signal from the control
panel or a remote controller.
At this time, playback signal phase is identical to that of the video input or video signal from the external switcher.
When CONFI play is disabled by setting of the item 316 (MODE 3: REC ONLY), the phase of the playback signal is identical
to that of the output phase in E-E mode.
• When using an editor such as the BVE-800:
Some editors such as the BVE-800 do not operate CONFI ON control (selecting a playback head) when editing.
When using these units and this setting is “external switcher”, shifting of picture or muting/discontinuity in the audio may
occur at the IN point/OUT point when editing.
When this problem occurs, set this item to “internal”, or set the VTR to CONFI ON mode through the VTR control panel.
However, the editing result is normal no matter what this setting is.
Appendix
Appendix
A-33
Menu List
Items Related to Digital Processing (900s)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number
901
Item
VIDEO OUTPUT
DATA
Settable range
0 8 bit
[1] [10 bit]
Function
Specifies the bit length of the video output data from video
processing (bit reduction processing).
0: When an 8-bit system is connected to the unit.
1: When an DVW-A500/1 series unit or a 10-bit system is
connected to the unit.
Note
Select the same bit length as that of the equipment
connected.
SYSTEM EE
MODE
[0]
1
2
3
[off]
DPR
RF1
RF2
Selects bypass E-E mode for normal operations or system
E-E mode for maintenance. There are three types of signal
paths in system E-E mode.
0 : Bypass E-E mode for normal operations.
1 : System E-E mode that returns the video/audio signal
within the DPR board after digital processing.
2 : System E-E mode that returns the video/audio signal
through the input interface IC on the EQ board, and sent
out to DPR.
3 : System E-E mode that returns the video/audio signal
through all EQ board circuits except the head.
In bypass E-E mode, the video/audio signal does not pass
through all circuits. System E-E mode can be used for
checking VTR functions at the time of installation.
To activate system E-E mode, first select 1, 2, or 3, then
press the CLR button and REC button simultaneously.
System E-E mode is active only while you press these
buttons. When you release these buttons, bypass E-E
mode is automatically activated.
903
FREEZE MODE
[0]
1
2
3
4
[field]
field 1
field 2
frame 1+2
frame 2+1
Specifies the freeze (still-picture) mode and freeze timing
during manual freezing (by REMOTE1 (9P) or REMOTE2
(50P) connector on the control panel) or automatic freezing.
0: Freezes the odd or even field, depending on the timing in
freeze mode.
1: Freezes the first (odd) field
2: Freezes the second (even) field
3: Freezes the first and the subsequent second field
4: Freezes the second field and the subsequent first field
Appendix
902
The first and second fields are determined using the
reference video signal as a standard. In the case of
freezing in playback modes other than normal playback, the
picture is freezed in frame mode only when dynamic
tracking is performing a frame operation. The picture is
freezed in field mode when dynamic tracking is not
operating.
The freezed picture does not change even if you change
this setting during freeze mode. The change to this setting
becomes effective when the VTR outputs a still picture next
time. When the stop freeze function is enabled, regardless
of the setting of this item, the picture is freezed in frame
mode only when dynamic tracking is performing a frame
operation, or is freezed in field mode when dynamic
tracking is performing a field operation or when it is not
operating.
A-34
Appendix
Function
Determines the freeze operation control by button
operations.
0: The picture is freezed only while the button is held down
1: The picture is freezed when the button is pressed, and
remains freezed when the button is released.
The freezed picture is cancelled when the button is
pressed again.
Button operations
• Freezing in odd or even (first or second) field is specified
by item 903. Distinction between the first or second field
is, however, follows that the distinction in the reference
signal.
Item number
904
Item
FREEZE
CONTROL
FROM KEY
PANEL
Settable range
[0] [momentary]
1 latch
905
AUTO FREEZE
CONTROL
[0] [disable]
1 MODE1
= auto release
2 MODE2
= release via stop
Specifies the operation performed (condition for cancelling
still-picture mode) for the automatic freeze function.
The automatic freeze function detects sudden deterioration
(intrusion into unrecorded tape sections) of the channel
condition in dynamic tracking playback modes (VAR, JOG,
PLAY, SHTL), then freezes the picture.
0: The automatic freeze function is off
1: Freeze mode is automatically cancelled when the
playback conditions return to normal
2: Freeze mode is automatically cancelled when playback
is stopped.
• The freeze mode (field/frame) during the automatic freeze
function is set by item 903.
• The freeze mode is immediately cancelled under the
following conditions, no matter what the setting of this
item is:
When edit preset is on
When the VTR is in CUE UP mode
When the VTR is in REC mode
906
STOP FREEZE
CONTROL
• SYS1 and SYS2
ROM Version1.20
and higher
[0] [disable]
1 enable
Enable or disables the stop freeze function.
Stop freeze opration
STOP
TENSION OFF
STDBY OFF
STILL
(dynamic tracking on)
DT picture
DT picture
DT picture
CAPSTAN drive
(includes shuttling up to ×10
normal tape speed)
DT picture
non-DT picture
non-DT picture
Reel drive
(includes shuttling over ×10
normal tape speed)
non-DT picture
non-DT picture
non-DT picture
Appendix
MODE (After)
MODE (Before)
• A “DT picture” is a freezed picture in noiseless DT playback mode. The picture freezes in frame mode when the dynamic
tracking is performing a frame operation. It freezes in field mode when dynamic tracking is not performing a frame
operation.
• A “non-DT picture” is a freezed picture in shuttle mode. A block pattern may appear in a non-DT picture, depending on the
circumstances.
Appendix
A-35
Menu List
Item
PITCH
CORRECTION
IN P.PLAY
Settable range
[0] [on]
1 off
Function
Specifies whether the pitch correction is conducted in
digital audio signal processing during playback in program
play mode.
0 : Pitch correction is conducted.
1 : Pitch correction is not conducted.
When the pitch correction is not conducted, an audio signal
whose pitch changes according to the tape speed is output
from SIF, AES/EBU, and ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT
connectors.
However, the sampling rate for digital audio output (SIF and
AES/EBU) signals are converted (rate-converted) to 48 kHz.
908a)
(with optional
BKDW-507)
PITCH DET FOR
CH1/CH2 IN
P.PLAY
0 ch1
1 ch2
[2] [ch1+ch2]
909a)
(with optional
BKDW-507)
PITCH DET FOR
CH3/CH4 IN
P.PLAY
0 ch3
1 ch4
[2] [ch3+ch4]
910a)
(with optional
BKDW-507)
PLAY MODE
AFTER P.PLAY
[0] [p.play 0 ]
%
1 normal play
Pitch information (musical interval) is necessary for
carrying out pitch correction of digital audio signals in
channels 1 and 2. This item specifies the channel from
which this information is detected.
Pitch correction is simultaneously executed in channels 1
and 2 according to the detected information.
0 : Detects the pitch information from the audio signal in
channel 1.
1 : Detects the pitch information from the audio signal in
channel 2.
2 : Detects the pitch information from the average of the
audio signals in channels 1 and 2.
Pitch information (musical interval) is necessary for carrying
out pitch correction of digital audio signals in channels 3
and 4. This item specifies the channel from which this
information is detected.
Pitch correction is simultaneously executed in channels 3
and 4 according to the detected information.
0 : Detects the pitch information from the audio signal in
channel 3.
1 : Detects the pitch information from the audio signal in
channel 4.
2 : Detects the pitch information from the average of the
audio signals in channels 3 and 4.
Specifies the operation of the VTR when it changes from
program play mode to play mode.
0 : The speed deviation of 0% of program play mode is
maintained for video and audio signals even when
changing to play mode.
1 : When changing to play mode, the servo is re-locked to
the reference signal. Some disturbance in the audio and
video signals will occur at this time.
To prevent picture disturbance when the VTR changes
from program play mode to mode other than play mode,
set items 905 and 906 to a setting other than “disable”.
Appendix
Item number
907a)
(with optional
BKDW-507)
a) This item is displayed when the BKDW-507 is installed.
A-36
Appendix
Items Set by Switches on Models DVW-A500, A-500P, 500, and 500P (Ks)
The following items are set through switches and
buttons on the control panel on models DVW-A500,
A500P, 500, and 500P.
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number
Item
Settable range
K01
PRE-READ
When on, prereading is performed during insert edit mode.
Specify the preread operation with item 319.
K02
CONFIDENCE
[0] [off]
1 on
[0] [off]
1 on
K03
REMOTE 9-PIN
[0] [off]
1 on
When on, the VTR is remotely controlled by a device
connected to the REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors.
Function
When on, the video and audio signals being recorded can
be monitored through simultaneous playback by the CONFI
heads.
Note
When operating the VTR through an external device
connected to the REMOTE1-IN (9P) or REMOTE
PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector, all of the tape operation
and editing buttons are disabled, with the exception of the
STOP and EJECT buttons. You can also set the VTR so
that all buttons are enabled or disabled.
For details, refer to the item 006.
REMOTE 50-PIN
[0] [off]
1 on
When on, the VTR is remotely controlled by the device
(optional BKDW-509) connected to the REMOTE
PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector.
K05
REC INHIBIT
[0] [off]
1 on
Selects record inhibit mode.
0: Recording is enabled (the REC INHIBIT indicator does
not light up).
1: Recording is disabled (the REC INHIBIT indicator lights
up).
Set the record-inhibit range with item 310.
If you attempt to an operation that is prohibited by the
record inhibit mode, the REC INHIBIT indicator flashes as
a warning.
For details, refer to the item 107.
K06
MONITOR MODE
SELECT (PB/EE)
0 PB
[1] [PB/EE]
Selects the video/audio signals to be output in fast-forward,
rewind, stop, or standby mode.
0: Playback signals
1: Input signals
Either setting can be specified during analog Betacam
playback on the DVW-A500/1 series; in actual operation,
however, only playback signals are output.
Appendix
A-37
Appendix
K04
Menu List
Item
Settable range
K07
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1)
CAPSTAN LOCK
[0] [2F]
1 4F
Switches the capstan servo lock mode for editing or playing
a tape with decoded component signals (i.e., a tape with
composite input data recorded on a Digital Betacam VTR
or Betacam/Betacam SP VTR).
0: The capstan servo is locked every 2 fields. Since color
framing is disabled, phase shifting (H-shifting) of output
video signals does not occur during playback. This is
the normal setting for editing or playback of component
signals.
To enhance the frequency characteristics, H-shifting of
the video output on the basis of the decoding
information on the tape may also be performed by
setting the item 712.
1: The capstan servo is locked to the color frame every 4
fields. The VTR maintains the phase of the video output
signals even after repeated stopping and restarting of
playback. Use this setting if you require continuity in
video phase at edit points during editing or playback of
composite signals, or when you perform AB rolling.
K07
(DVW-A500P/1
and 500P/1)
CAPSTAN LOCK
[0] [2F]
1 4F
2 8F
Switches the capstan servo lock mode for editing or playing
a tape with decoded component signals (i.e., a tape with
composite input data recorded on a Digital Betacam VTR
or Betacam/Betacam SP VTR).
0: The capstan servo is locked every 2 fields. Since color
framing is disabled, phase shifting (picture shifting) of
output video signals does not occur during playback.
This is the normal setting for editing or playback of
component signals.
To enhance the frequency characteristics, H-shifting of
the video output on the basis of the decoding
information on the tape may also be performed by
setting the item 712.
1: The capstan servo is locked every 4 fields. This is the
normal setting for editing of component signals with
quick servo lock.
To enhance the frequency characteristics, H-shifting of
the video output on the basis of the decoding
information on the tape may also be performed by
setting the item 712.
2: The capstan servo is locked to the color frame every 8
fields. The VTR maintains the phase of the video output
signals even after repeated stopping and restarting of
playback. Use this setting if you require continuity in
video phase at edit points during editing or playback of
composite signals, or when you perform AB rolling.
K08
TIMER SELECT
[0] [CTL]
1 TC
2 UBIT
Selects the time data display.
0: Displays the value read by the time code reader or the
value generated by the time code generator. To switch
between VITC and LTC, press the [F5] (TC SEL) button.
1: Counts the CTL signals on the playback tape or the CTL
signals being recorded on the tape, and displays the
tape running time in hours, minutes, seconds, and
frames.
2: Displays user bits data inserted in time code being
played back, or the user bits data inserted in time code
being recording. To switch between VITC and LTC,
press the [F5] (TC SEL) button.
K09
TC SELECT
[0] [ltc]
1 vitc
2 auto
Selects the time code to be read by the time code reader
during playback.
0: Reads LTC.
1: Reads VITC.
2: Reads VITC when the playback speed is ±1/2 times
normal speed or less, and LTC when it is greater than
±1/2 times normal speed.
Appendix
Item number
A-38
Appendix
Function
Item number
Item
Settable range
K10
TC GENERATOR
EXT/INT
[0] [internal]
1 external
K11
TC GENERATOR
REGEN/PRESET
[0] [preset]
1 regenerate
K12
REC RUN/FREE
RUN
[0] [free run]
1 rec run
Selects the time code running mode.
0: The time code advances when the power is on
regardless of the VTR’s operation mode.
1: The time code advances only during recording.
When selecting this setting, set the [F6] (TCG SOURCE)
button to int, the [F7] (TCG MODE) button to prst.
K13
DF/NDF
[0] [drop frame]
1 non-drop frame
Selects the running mode for the CTL counter and the time
code generator.
0: Drop frame mode (DF is displayed.)
1: Non-drop frame mode (NDF is displayed.)
K14
VITC
[0] [on]
1 off
Specifies the recording of VITC.
0: Records VITC generated by the internal time code
generator.
1: Does not record VITC. However, records VITC inserted
in the video input signal.
For details on the VITC insertion line, refer to “4-3-10
Setting the VITC Insertion Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)” on
page 4-26.
K15
ID PRESET
[0] [off]
1 on
The presetting of the ID code in non-volatile memory as
user bits data enables recalling and record it during later
recording sessions.
0: Records the user bits set through the control panel.
1: Records the preset ID code as user bits data.
For details on presetting ID code, refer to the item 603.
K16
SUPERIMPOSED
CHARACTER
0 off
[1] [on]
Set to on to superimpose time data and operation mode
indicated as character data onto the signals output from the
SERIAL V/A OUTPUT 4(SUPER) and VIDEO OUTPUT
COMPOSITE 3(SUPER) connectors.
0: Does not superimpose time data and operation mode.
1: Superimposes time data and operation mode.
K17
VIDEO INPUT
SELECT
[0] [sif]
1 composite
2 component(y-t/b)
Selects the video input signal.
0: The serial digital video signal input to the SERIAL V/A
INPUT connector.
1: The analog composite video signal input to the
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connector.
2: The analog component video signal input to the
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT connectors.
K18
OUTPUT
REFERENCE
SELECT
[0] ref.video
1 input video
Selects the signal to be used as the reference signal for
VTR operations.
0: The signal input to the REF.VIDEO connector is used as
the reference signal for playback and audio recording.
Digital audio and video input signals must synchronize
with this reference signal during recording.
1: The video input signal is used as the reference signal for
VTR operations. The [F1] (VIDEO IN) button in the PF1
menu (factory setting)switches the video input signal.
(DVW-A500/1
and 500/1 only)
Function
Selects the time code generated by the internal or external
time cord generator.
0: Selects the time code generated by the internal time
code generator.
1: Selects an external time code input to the TIME CODE
IN connector.
Selects the time code with which the internal time code
generator synchronizes.
0: Presets the initial settings of the time code generated by
the internal time code generator with operation through
the front panel or remote control from the device
connected to the REMOTE1-IN (9P) connector.
1: The internal time code reader synchronizes with the
time code read by the internal time code reader
(regenerates the time code).
A-39
Appendix
Appendix
Menu List
Item number
Item
K19
PROCESS
CONTROL
K21
AUDIO INPUT SEL
CH-1
K22
AUDIO INPUT SEL
CH-2
K23
AUDIO INPUT SEL
CH-3
K24
AUDIO INPUT SEL
CH-4
K25
DOLBY NR
(DVW-A500/1 and
A500P/1)
K26
AUDIO EMPHASIS
Appendix
A-40
Appendix
Settable range
0 remote
[1] [setup menu]
2 local
0
[1]
2
0
[1]
2
0
[1]
2
0
[1]
2
0
[1]
analog
[sif]
AES/EBU
analog
[sif]
AES/EBU
analog
[sif]
AES/EBU
analog
[sif]
AES/EBU
off
[on]
[0] [off]
1 on
Function
Selects the method for operating the internal digital video
processor.
0: Select this setting when using the optional BVR-50
Remote controller to remotely control the internal digital
video processor.
1: Select this setting when adjusting the settings of the
internal digital video processor through items 715 to 721.
2: Select this setting when controlling the internal digital
processor from the control panel of the VTR.
Note
Changing the PROCESS CONTROL setting during
playback may cause a momentary interruption in the sound
output.
Selects the audio input signal for the various channels.
0: Audio signal input to the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT
connectors.
1: Audio signal input to the SERIAL V/A INPUT connector.
2: Audio signal input to the AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors.
Turns on and off the Dolby NR (noise reduction) C system
which is used for cue audio tracks only when using an
oxide tape. The system automatically turns on when using
a metal tape.
0: Plays back an analog Betacam oxide tape without the
Dolby NR system.
1: Plays back an analog Betacam oxide tape with the
Dolby NR system.
Set to emphasize to a digital audio signal that has been
converted from an analog audio input signal.
This setting also allows you to emphasize while digitizing a
playback audio signal from a conventional Betacam
cassette.
Item number
K27
K28
K29
K41
K43
Appendix
A-41
Appendix
K42
Settable range
Function
[ch1 – – – – ]
AUDIO MONITOR- [1]
Selects the audio signal to be output at the MONITOR
L SELECT
2 – ch2 – – –
OUTPUT L/R connector(s). If you specify more than one
3 ch1ch2 – – –
channel to the same MONITOR OUTPUT connector, a
4 – – ch3 – –
mixed audio signal is output from that connector.
5 ch1 – ch3 – –
AUDIO MONITOR6 – ch2 ch3 – –
R SELECT
7 ch1ch2 ch3 – –
8 – – – ch4 –
9 ch1 – – ch4 –
10 – ch2 – ch4 –
11 ch1ch2 – ch4 –
12 – – ch3 ch4 –
13 ch1 – ch3 ch4 –
14 – ch2 ch3 ch4 –
15 ch1ch2 ch3 ch4 –
16 – – – – cue
17 ch1 – – – cue
18 – ch2 – – cue
19 ch1ch2 – – cue
20 – – ch3 – cue
21 ch1 – ch3 – cue
22 – ch2 ch3 – cue
23 ch1ch2 ch3 – cue
24 – – – ch4 cue
25 ch1 – – ch4 cue
26 – ch2 – ch4 cue
27 ch1ch2 – ch4 cue
28 – – ch3 ch4 cue
29 ch1 – ch3 ch4 cue
30 – ch2 ch3 ch4 cue
31 ch1ch2 ch3 ch4 cue
[0] [off]
When set to on, the KEY INHIBIT indicator on the upper
KEY INHIBIT
1 on
control panel lights up and all or some of the REMOTE,
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT and editing buttons on
the lower control panel are disabled.
For details on specifying the switches and buttons to be
disabed, refer to the item 118.
0 high
Sets the keyboard sound volume.
KEY BEEP
1 low
[2] [off]
Sets the alarm volume.
[0] [high]
ALARM BEEP
1 low
2 off
0 3 min
Sets the elapsed time after which the screen-saver is
SCREEN SAVER
1 10 min
activated.
2 60 min
[3] [off]
Item
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
K44
CUE MENU
DEFAULT MODE
SEL
[0] [page mode]
1 extend mode
K45
CUE MENU PREROLL OFFSET
K46
POWER-ON
MENU SELECT
[0] [0 sec]
1 1 sec
I
I
30 30 sec
[0] [HOME menu]
1 TC menu
2 CUE menu
3 PF1 menu
4 PF2 menu
Item assignable to PF1 and PF2 menus are items 001
to 910, K1 to K46 which are included in the VTR
SETUP menu, and K61 to K76 described below. They
all appear in the PF ASSIGN menu.
Function
Selects the default mode to be activated when you activate
the CUE menu.
0: PAGE mode
1: EXTEND mode
Specifies the preroll time to a cue point.
You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1-second
units.
Selects the menu to be activated automatically when you
turn on the power.
Item K61 to K76 does not appear in the VTR SETUP
menu, and the settings of these items return to their
factory settings when you turn the power off.
Item number
Item
Function
K61
ASSEMBLE
Selects assemble editing.
K62
INS TC
Selects the insert channel(s) for insert editing.
K63
INS VIDEO
K64
INS A-CH1
K65
INS A-CH2
Appendix
K66
INS A-CH3
K67
INS A-CH4
K68
K69
INS A-CH CUE
FREEZE
K70
DMC
K71
P-PLAY
K73
LAST EDIT
K74
TIMER RESET
Resets the internal time code generator.
CTL: The time data display becomes 00H00M00S00F and all edit points are erased.
TC or UBIT: The time data display becomes 00H00M00S00F (TC) or 00 00 00 00
(UBIT). Edit points are not affected.
K75
TIMER SET
Register this item to a function button in the PF1/2 menu and press the button to set
the desired time code or user bits.
K76
TIMER HOLD
Register this item to a function button in the PF1/2 menu and press the button to stop
advancing the time data.
A-42
Appendix
A still-picture is output when you press the function button which this item is registered.
Register this item to a function button in the PF1/2 menu and press the button to
record, automatically play and automatically edit a signal played back at speed
between –1 to +3 times normal playing speed.
Index
B
Backspace editing 4-32
Basic automatic editing 6-2, 6-6
BKDW-510 2-15
BREAKER button 2-15
C
Capstan override mode 2-12
Capstan override playback 5-10
D
Deleting edit points 6-9
Digital time counter 1-4
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button 2-2
Displaying the duration 6-7
DMC editing
overview 6-14
performing 6-15
setting edit points and playback speed
6-14
DMC playback
overview 5-10
performing 5-12
Drop frame mode 4-22
E
ECC encoder 1-1
EDIT button 2-10
Edit point
automatic setting 6-6
confirming 6-7
deleting 6-9
edit points 6-7
modifying 6-9
setting 6-4
Editing
performing 6-13
stop 6-13
Editing precautions 6-1
EJECT button 2-9
Ejecting the cassette 3-8
EMPHASIS 4-37
ENTRY button 2-8
EXTEND mode 4-28
External sync signal for the internal
reference video output and servo system
3-3
External sync signal for the internal
reference video signal generator 3-3
F, G
Features 1-1
Function buttons 2-5
H
Head cleaning 7-1
HOME menu 4-13
I
IC memory card insertion slot 2-6
ID preset 4-23
IC memory cards 1-3
IN/OUT buttons 2-8
Indicator window 2-3
Indicators 2-3
INPUT SELECT button 2-4
Insert editing 6-3
J, K
JOG button 2-11
Jog mode 2-12, 5-8
Jog mode playback 5-8
L
Lower control panel
editing operations section 2-7
menu operation section 2-5
search operations section 2-11
tape transport section 2-9
Index
I-1
Index
AC IN connector 2-15
ACCESS button 2-6
Adding titles 4-11
Adjusting
audio playback level 5-6
audio playback level manually 5-6
output video signal 4-34
recording level 5-3
system sub-carrier phase 4-35
system synchronization phase 4-35
Advanced automatic editing 6-14
ALARM indicator 2-6
ALT button 2-6
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT
connectors 2-15
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT
connectors 2-15
Appendix A-1
Assemble editing 6-3
AUDIO IN/OUT buttons 2-8
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors 2-15
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600Ω termination
switches 2-15
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
buttons 2-4
Audio level meters 2-3
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors 2-16
AUTO EDIT button 2-8
Automatic edit modes 6-1
Automatic editing
confirming edit points 6-7
consecutive editing 6-17
cuing up and prerolling 6-7
DMC editing 6-15
modifying edit points 6-9
overview of automatic editing 6-1
performing editing 6-11
preread editing 6-18
previewing 6-8
quick editing 6-16
selecting the edit mode 6-3
setting edit points 6-4
setting switches and menus 6-2
steps in automatic editing 6-1
Cassettes
handling cassettes 3-7
inserting and ejecting cassettes 3-7
preventing accidental erasure 3-8
recommended cassettes 3-7
Changing
menu settings 4-2
preroll time 6-8
CLR button 2-8
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
connectors 2-15
COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT
connectors 2-15
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors
and 75Ω termination switch 2-15
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT
connectors 2-15
Confirming
edit points 6-7
result of the editing 6-13
Connecting external equipment
external sync signal 3-3
making analog connections 3-2
making digital connections 3-1
Connector panel 2-14
Control panel
lower control panel
(editing operations section) 2-7
lower control panel
(menu operations section) 2-5
lower control panel
(search operations section) 2-11
lower control panel
(tape transport section) 2-9
upper control panel 2-2
CONTROL PANEL connector 2-13, 2-15
CONTROL PANEL switch 2-13
Cross-fade editing A-18
CUE menu 4-27
Cue point
changing into an edit point 4-32
erasing 4-30
prerolling 4-31
registrating 4-28
Cursor control buttons 2-8
Cut editing A-18
Index
A
Index
M
Index
MAINTENANCE menu 1-3
MAINTENANCE switch 2-6
Making analog connections 3-2
Manual editing 6-19
Memory card
formatting 4-6
insertion slot 2-6
recalling 4-9
storing 4-7
MEMORY CARD indicator 2-6
Menu
configuration 4-1
CUE menu 4-27
HOME menu 4-13
IC memory card function 4-6
list A-7
PANEL SETUP menu 4-42
PF1 menu 4-33
PF2 menu 4-36
registering items to the PF1/2 menus
4-3
settings 4-2
SET UP menu 4-38
TC menu 4-18
VTR SETUP menu 4-40
Menu buttons 2-6
Menu display 2-6
Moisture condensation 7-2
MONITOR OUTPUT connectors 2-16
MONITOR SELECT button 2-3
Monitoring
during previewing 6-9
previously recorded signals while
recording 5-4
signals currently being recorded 5-4
video and audio signals of the recorder
6-12
Monitoring signals during editing 6-12
Monitoring video and audio signals while
recording 5-4
N
Normal-speed playback 5-7
Numeric buttons and +/– buttons 2-8
O
Outputting still-pictures 4-15
Overview
automatic editing 6-1
DMC editing 6-14
DMC playback 5-10
setting edit points and playback speed
6-14
P, Q
PAGE mode 4-28
PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector 2-16
I-2
Index
PB audio output level controls 2-3
Personal function menu 4-3
PF1 menu 4-33
PF2 menu 4-36
PHONES jack 2-2
PHONES level control 2-3
PLAY button 2-10, 5-9
Playback 5-7
capstan override playback 5-10
DMC playback 5-10
normal-speed playback 5-7
program playback 5-13
variable mode playback 5-8
PLAYER/RECORDER buttons 2-8
POWER switch 2-2
Preparing for playback 5-6
adjusting the audio playback level 5-6
setting switches and menus 5-6
Preparing for recording
adjusting the audio recording level 5-3
monitoring simultaneous playback of
recording analog audio 5-4
selecting audio signals 5-2
setting switches and menus 5-1
video and audio signals being recorded
5-4
PREREAD indicator 2-8
Preread editing 6-18
Preroll
cue point 4-31
PREROLL button 2-9
PREVIEW button 2-8
R
RCL button 2-8
REC button 2-10
REC INHIBIT indicator 2-10
REC level controls 2-3
Recording 5-5
Recording the carrent time
4-21
Recording time code and user bit
external time code 4-22
selecting the time code running mode
4-22
synchronization with an external time
code 4-22
Recording VITC 4-23
REF.VIDEO INPUT connectors and 75Ω
termination switch 2-15
Reference signal for the servo system 3-4
Reference signals connections 3-5
Reference signals for video output and
servo system 3-3
REMOTE buttons 2-4
REMOTE1-IN/OUT connectors 2-16
REVIEW button 2-8
RS-232C connector 2-4, 2-16
RS-232C indicator 2-4
S
Search dial 2-12
Selecting
audio input signals 5-2
audio signals 5-2
audio signals to be monitored 5-2
capstan servo lock mode 4-16
CTL display mode 4-23
drop frame mode 4-22
edit mode 6-3
input video signal 4-34
monitor mode 4-15
monitor output signal 4-37
multi-cue mode 4-28
program playback 4-17
reference signal 4-34
SERIAL V/A INPUT connectors 2-15
SERIAL V/A OUTPUT connectors 2-15
Servo 3-3
SERVO indicator 2-9
SET button 2-8
SET UP menu 4-38
Setting
edit points 6-3
switches and menus 5-6, 6-2
time code 4-20
user bit 4-21
Setting the dolby NR system 4-37
Setting the preroll time 4-16
Setting the test signal 4-39
Setting the VITC insertion line 4-26
SFT button 2-8
SHUTTLE button 2-11
Shuttle mode 2-12, 5-8
Shuttle mode playback 5-8
Simultaneous playback 4-14
Split editing 6-6
automatic edit point setting 6-6
STANDBY button 2-10
Steps in automatic editing 6-1
STOP button 2-10
Storing playback speeds in memory 5-11
Super imposition of character
information 4-23
Switching the control of the digital video
processer 4-34
System set-up panel 2-13
T
TC menu 4-18
Time code
RUN MODE 4-22
Time code generator (TCG) 4-21
drop frame mark 4-24
recording 4-22
setting 4-21
TIME CODE IN connector 2-16
TIME CODE OUT connector 2-16
Index
Time code reader (TCR) 4-21
drop frame mark 4-24
setting 4-21
Time data
selecting the time data display 4-19
setting 4-19
types of time data 4-19
U
Upper control panel 2-2
User bits
setting 4-21
V, W, X, Y, Z
VAR button 2-11
Variable mode 5-8
Variable mode playback 5-9
Variable speed playback in jog/shuttle/
variable modes 5-8
Variable speed playback mode 2-12
VIDEO CONTROL connector 2-16
VIDEO INPUT SELECT buttons 2-4
VTR memory banks
recalling 4-4
storing 4-4
VTR SETUP menu
items related to digital process A-34
items related to editing A-15
items related to operation panels A-10
items related to prerolling A-19
items related to recording protection
A-20
items related to remote interface A-14
items related to the audio control A-31
items related to the hours meter A-7
items related to the time code generator
A-21
items related to the video control A-24
items related to VTR operations A-8
items set by switches on models DVWA500/A500P/500/500P A-37
Index
I-3
∇
A-IN
CH4
PREV
CATEG
NEXT
CATEG
MULTI
LOOP
off
cb100
etc.
indicates the existence of other menu levels.
VTR
SETUP
high
low
off
on
off
SET
BLANK
KEY
BEEP
ALT
+PF2
KEYINH
PF2
PANEL
SETUP
ALT
+PF1
PF1
EDIT
TITLE
EDIT
TITLE
∇
VTR
SETUP
on
off
PF1&2
ASSIGN
∇
PANEL
SETUP
prst
xxH
CHANGE
DATA
high
low
off
CUENUM
SET
DF
NDF
on
off
VITC
on
off
INS
CUE
F10
>>
<<
DIRECTION
>>
<<
DIRECTION
on
off
3min
10min
60min
off
MON-R
SEL
prst
xxH
CANCEL
COPY
COPY
on
off
SAVE/
EXIT
EXIT
SAVE/
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
1,2,3,4,5 1,2,3,4,5
MON-L
SEL
prst
xxH
REMOTE REMOTE
50-PIN
9-PIN
prst
xxH
CHROMA SYSTEM SYSTEM
SC
PHASE
SYNC
ALARM SCREEN
BEEP
SAVER
PASTE
SELECT
ALL
off
on
DOLBY EMPHANR
SIS
prst
xxH
FORMAT
CARD
SHOW
CUESET
∇
∇
∇
SHOW
SETUP
PF1&2
ASSIGN
MEMORY
CARD
VTR
BANK
prst
xxH
Y/C
DELAY
PAGE
SET
free
rec
regen
prst
int
ext
CHROMA SETUP
LEVEL
GAIN
(BLACK
LEVEL)
0 to 30 s
CUE
P-ROLL
VITC
AUTO
LTC
DF/NDF
RUN
MODE
TCG
MODE
TC
SEL
TCG
SOURCE
on
off
on
off
on
off
INS
A-CH1
on
off
F9
on
off
F8
INS
A-CH4
INS
A-CH2
F7
INS
A-CH3
F6
INS
VIDEO
F5
MEMORY
CARD
VTR BANK
SET UP
A-IN
CH3
sif
sif
sif
sif
AES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU
analg
analg
analg
analg
A-IN
CH2
sif
cmpst
y-r/b
A-IN
CH1
prst
xxH
menu
local
rmt
ref
input
VIDEO
IN
PF1
(Factory setting)
PF2
(Factory setting)
VIDEO
GAIN
PROC
CONTRL
OUT
REF
PREV
PAGE
on
off
TIMER
HOLD
on
off
INS
TC
F4
CUE
CTL
TC
UBIT
NEXT
PAGE
TIMER
SET
TIMER
SEL
TIMER
RESET
TC
on
off
on
off
off
[video,
audio,
a/v]
HOME
ASSEMBLE
CONFI
PRE
READ
Menu
F3
F2
F1
+ – 12H
24H
TAPE
TIMER
off
[all,
crash,
video,
audio]
REC
INH
F1
F6
0 to 30 s
P-ROLL
TIME
ALT
on
off
2FD
4FD
(8FD)
CAP
LOCK
F5
on
off
F4
CHARA
SUPER
on
off
FREEZE
F3
0 to 24
(0 to 22)
CHARA
H-POS
DMC
F7
PAGE
MODE
0 to 6A
(0 to 81)
CHARA
V-POS
P-PLAY
F8
VITC
POS-2
LAST
EDIT
F10
on
off
AUDIO
SG
EXTEND
MODE
on
off
VIDEO
SG
12 to 20 12 to 20
(9 to 22) (9 to 22)
VITC
POS-1
F9
Items and settings in parentheses are for PAL.
ID
PRESET
PB/EE
PB
PB/EE
F2
Function Button List (Factory Settings)
The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment
described in this manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose
other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment
described in this manual without the express written
permission of Sony Corporation.
Le matériel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en
informations qui sont la propriété de Sony Corporation et
sont destinées exclusivement à l’usage des acquéreurs de
l’équipement décrit dans ce manuel.
Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de quelque
partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi pour tout
autre but que des opérations ou entretiens de l’équipement
à moins d’une permission écrite de Sony Corporation.
Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus
Informationen, die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind,
und ausschließlich zum Gebrauch durch den Käufer der in
dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausrüstung bestimmt sind.
Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdrücklich die
Vervielfältigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den
Gebrauch derselben für irgendeinen anderen Zweck als die
Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung
beschriebenen Ausrüstung ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche
Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation.
DVW-A500/1
Sony Corporation
DVW-A500P/1
Communication System Solutions Network Company
DVW-500/1
DVW-500P/1 (UC/EK,
BKDW-515 (WW,
3-800-541-04(1)
)
)
Printed in Japan
2000.09.13
© 1995
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising